Sie sind auf Seite 1von 292

ZXONM E300

Unified EMS/SNMS of Optical Network


Operation Manual
(Volume II) SDH Network Element Operations
Version 3.19
ZTE CORPORATION
ZTE Plaza, Keji Road South,
Hi-Tech Industrial Park,
Nanshan District, Shenzhen,
P. R. China
518057
Tel: (86) 755 26771900 800-9830-9830
Fax: (86) 755 26772236
URL: http://support.zte.com.cn
E-mail: doc@zte.com.cn



LEGAL INFORMATION

Copyright 2006 ZTE CORPORATION.

The contents of this document are protected by copyright laws and international treaties. Any reproduction or distribution of
this document or any portion of this document, in any form by any means, without the prior written consent of ZTE
CORPORATION is prohibited. Additionally, the contents of this document are protected by contractual confidentiality
obligations.

All company, brand and product names are trade or service marks, or registered trade or service marks, of ZTE
CORPORATION or of their respective owners.

This document is provided as is, and all express, implied, or statutory warranties, representations or conditions are
disclaimed, including without limitation any implied warranty of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, title or non-
infringement. ZTE CORPORATION and its licensors shall not be liable for damages resulting from the use of or reliance on
the information contained herein.

ZTE CORPORATION or its licensors may have current or pending intellectual property rights or applications covering the
subject matter of this document. Except as expressly provided in any written license between ZTE CORPORATION and its
licensee, the user of this document shall not acquire any license to the subject matter herein.

ZTE CORPORATION reserves the right to upgrade or make technical change to this product without further notice.

Users may visit ZTE technical support website http://ensupport.zte.com.cn to inquire related information.

The ultimate right to interpret this product resides in ZTE CORPORATION.
Revision History
Date Revision No. Serial No. Description
J une 25, 2008 R1.0 sjzl20081481 First version


ZTE CORPORATION
Values Your Comments & Suggestions!
Your opinion is of great value and will help us improve the quality of our product
documentation and offer better services to our customers.
Please fax to: (86) 755-26772236; or mail to Publications R&D Department, ZTE
CORPORATION, ZTE Plaza, A Wing, Keji Road South, Hi-Tech Industrial Park,
Shenzhen, P. R. China 518057.
Thank you for your cooperation!
Document
Name
ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Unified EMS/SNMS of Optical Network Operation
Manual (Volume II) SDH Network Element Operations
Product
Version
V3.19
Document
Revision Number
R1.0
Equipment Installation Date
Presentation:
(Introductions, Procedures, Illustrations, Completeness, Level of Detail, Organization,
Appearance)
Good Fair Average Poor Bad N/A
Accessibility:
(Contents, Index, Headings, Numbering, Glossary)
Good Fair Average Poor Bad N/A
Your
evaluation of
this
documentation
I ntelligibility:
(Language, Vocabulary, Readability & Clarity, Technical Accuracy, Content)
Good Fair Average Poor Bad N/A
Your
suggestions for
improvement
of this
documentation
Please check the suggestions which you feel can improve this documentation:
Improve the overview/introduction Make it more concise/brief
Improve the Contents Add more step-by-step procedures/tutorials
Improve the organization Add more troubleshooting information
Include more figures Make it less technical
Add more examples Add more/better quick reference aids
Add more detail Improve the index
Other suggestions
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
# Please feel free to write any comments on an attached sheet.
If you wish to be contacted regarding your comments, please complete the following:
Name Company
Postcode Address
Telephone E-mail


This page is intentionally blank.


Contents

About this Manual .......................................................................................i
Purpose..................................................................................................................i
Intended Audience...................................................................................................i
Prerequisite Skill and Knowledge...............................................................................i
What in This Manual ................................................................................................ i
Related Documentation........................................................................................... ii
Conventions...........................................................................................................iii
How to Get in Touch ...............................................................................................v
Customer Support...................................................................................................................v
Documentation Support...........................................................................................................v
PART A............................................................................................ 1
Configuration Operations...........................................................................1
Chapter 1........................................................................................ 3
Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration..................................3
Configuration Flow..................................................................................................3
Configuration Example............................................................................................5
Networking Configuration ........................................................................................................5
Networking Analysis and Service Configuration.........................................................................6
Connecting EMS and NE ..........................................................................................................7
Creating NE.............................................................................................................................8
Installing Board.....................................................................................................................10
Establishing Connection.........................................................................................................14
Configuring Two-fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring..........................................................................17
Configuring Four-fiber 1+1 MSP Link......................................................................................22
Configuring Service ...............................................................................................................24
Configuring Clock Source.......................................................................................................28
Configuring the Orderwire......................................................................................................30
Modifying the NE State..........................................................................................................33
Downloading NE Database.....................................................................................................34
Chapter 2...................................................................................... 37
Circuit Service Configuration.................................................................. 37


Configuration Flow................................................................................................ 37
Service Layer Circuit..............................................................................................................38
PDH Circuit ...........................................................................................................................39
Broadcast Circuit ...................................................................................................................40
Concatenation Circuit.............................................................................................................42
Data Service Circuit...............................................................................................................43
Configuring PDH Circuit......................................................................................... 44
Chapter 3...................................................................................... 49
Ethernet Service Configuration............................................................... 49
Configuration of Ethernet Service Transparent Transmission..................................... 49
Configuring TGEB Board ........................................................................................................51
Configuring TFE Board...........................................................................................................53
Configuration of Smart Ethernet Board................................................................... 58
Configuring SFE/SGE Series Boards........................................................................................58
Configuring SE Boards...........................................................................................................68
Configuration of RPR Ethernet Service.................................................................... 85
Configuring RSEA Board ........................................................................................................86
Configuring RSEB-RPR Board.................................................................................................94
Configuring RSEB-EOS Board.................................................................................................98
Configuring MPLS Ethernet Service....................................................................... 100
Configuring EPL Service.......................................................................................................101
Configuring EVPL Service.....................................................................................................110
Configuring EVPLAN Service.................................................................................................118
VLAN Configuration Example ............................................................................... 123
Networking Analysis and Board Configuration.......................................................................124
Configuring Card Property....................................................................................................125
Establishing Connection.......................................................................................................130
Creating User and VLAN ......................................................................................................130
Setting VLAN.......................................................................................................................130
Configuring Timeslot............................................................................................................131
Chapter 4.................................................................................... 133
ATM Service Configuration.................................................................... 133
Configuration Flow.............................................................................................. 133
Configuration Example........................................................................................ 137
Networking Analysis and Card Configuration.........................................................................138
Configuring Port ..................................................................................................................140
Establishing Connection.......................................................................................................141
Establishing PVC Connection................................................................................................141
Configuring Passed-by NEs ..................................................................................................144
Chapter 5.................................................................................... 145
Common SDH Management Operations............................................... 145
Setting Misconnection Resistance......................................................................... 145
Setting APS Byte ................................................................................................ 147
Configuring DCC................................................................................................. 149
Configuring Static Route...................................................................................... 152
Configuring Gateway NE...................................................................................... 154
Setting Managing Capacity Expansion................................................................... 157
Setting Circuit Auto Search.................................................................................. 163
Setting Circuit Query........................................................................................... 163
Setting Broadcast Circuit Query ........................................................................... 165
Setting NE Auto Search....................................................................................... 166
Setting Port Mask to Find Link.............................................................................. 169
PART B........................................................................................ 171
Running Operations .............................................................................. 171
Chapter 6.................................................................................... 173
Alarm Management............................................................................... 173
Alarm Configuration............................................................................................ 173
Setting Alarm Mask.............................................................................................................173
Setting Alarm Severity.........................................................................................................175
Setting Alarm Severity Template..........................................................................................176
Setting Alarm Standby.........................................................................................................176
Setting Alarm Audible..........................................................................................................178
Setting Alarm Audio.............................................................................................................178
Setting Alarm Color .............................................................................................................179
Setting Alarm Prompt..........................................................................................................180
Setting Alarm Filter..............................................................................................................181
Setting Agent External Alarm...............................................................................................182
Setting Alarm Auto Acknowledgement Time .........................................................................183
Setting Alarm Diagnose Rule................................................................................................184
Setting Email or Short Message Output of Alarm...................................................................185
Detecting Free AU...............................................................................................................186
Setting Alarm Parameter .....................................................................................................187
Alarm Query ...................................................................................................... 188
Querying Current Alarms.....................................................................................................188
Querying History Alarms......................................................................................................193
Querying Locked Alarms......................................................................................................195
Querying Protection Switching Events...................................................................................196
Querying Over Threshold Alarms..........................................................................................197
Analyzing Circuit Alarm Correlation.......................................................................................198


Chapter 7.................................................................................... 201
Performance Management.................................................................... 201
Performance Configuration.................................................................................. 201
Setting Digital Performance Threshold..................................................................................201
Setting Analog Performance Threshold.................................................................................202
Resetting Performance Register ...........................................................................................203
Restraining Zero Performance..............................................................................................204
Masking Performance ..........................................................................................................205
Setting Performance Collection Time ....................................................................................206
Setting SNC Switching.........................................................................................................207
Setting Data Flow Supervision Parameter .............................................................................209
Performance Query............................................................................................. 210
Querying Current Performance.............................................................................................210
Querying History Performance .............................................................................................211
Setting Performance Statistics..............................................................................................213
Setting Performance Prediction ............................................................................................214
Setting Performance Task Management ...............................................................................215
State Management ............................................................................................. 217
Querying Card Running State...............................................................................................217
Querying History Running State...........................................................................................217
Setting State Mask..............................................................................................................218
Setting State Threshold.......................................................................................................218
Chapter 8.................................................................................... 221
Maintenance Operations....................................................................... 221
Setting Loopback................................................................................................ 221
Inserting Alarms................................................................................................. 224
Inserting Bit Error............................................................................................... 226
Setting Protection Switching ................................................................................ 228
Setting APS Operation of MSP.............................................................................. 229
Resetting Cards.................................................................................................. 230
Querying Maintenance State................................................................................ 231
Setting Forced State of CS Card........................................................................... 231
Setting Main/Standby NCP Switching.................................................................... 232
Orienting OW Error ............................................................................................. 233
Testing Communication....................................................................................... 234
Ethernet Maintenance ......................................................................................... 235
Querying VLAN Bridge Running State...................................................................................235
Querying Running State of Physical Port ...............................................................................235
Querying Multicast State......................................................................................................236
Querying LCAS Running State of Virtual Concatenation.........................................................236
Querying RPR Ring Topology................................................................................................237
Querying RPR Ring Topology State.......................................................................................237
Querying RPR Physical Port Running State............................................................................238
Querying MSTP Universal.....................................................................................................239
Setting Port Mirroring ..........................................................................................................239
Setting Data Board Ping Function.........................................................................................240
Querying Card Version........................................................................................ 241
Setting Time Management................................................................................... 243
Configuring NE Synchronous Time ....................................................................... 244
Querying SFP ..................................................................................................... 245
Setting SFP Statistics .......................................................................................... 246
Setting Daily Fault Report.................................................................................... 247
PART C........................................................................................ 251
System Operations................................................................................ 251
Chapter 9.................................................................................... 253
System Management ............................................................................ 253
Querying NCP Security Log.................................................................................. 253
NCP Data Management ....................................................................................... 254
Downloading Database........................................................................................................254
Uploading Database ............................................................................................................254
Uploading and Comparing Database.....................................................................................255
Setting Board Upload and Compare......................................................................................256
Uploading and Comparing Database Automatically................................................................257
Synchronizing NE Data into DB............................................................................................258
Clearing NCP Database........................................................................................................258
Report Management ........................................................................................... 259
Configuring Report ..............................................................................................................259
Configuring Current Alarm PSE Report..................................................................................260
Configuring History Alarm Performance PSE Report...............................................................261
Configuring Net Path Report.................................................................................................263
Abbreviations............................................................................. 267
Figures........................................................................................ 271
Tables ......................................................................................... 275
















This page is intentionally blank.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION i
About this Manual

Purpose
This manual provides the information about configurations, basic
operations of ZXONM E300.
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for engineers and technicians who perform
activities on ZTEs transmission equipment via ZXONM E300.
Prerequisite Skill and Knowledge
To use this manual effectively, users should have a general understanding
of optical transmission technology and network management system.
Familiarity with the following is helpful:
System and various components of transmission equipment of ZTE
User interfaces of ZXONM E300
Basic operations of ZXONM E300
What in This Manual
The operation manual is the Unitrans ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Unified
EMS/SNMS of Optical Network Operation Manual (Volume II) SDH Network
Element Operations. It consists of the following parts:
Chapter Description
PART A Configuration
Operations
Describes the configuration flow and detailed steps with a
networking example.
PART B Running Operations Describes alarm, performance, and maintenance operations
frequently used during the running of ZXONM E300.
PART C System Operations Describes some common system operations, including
security management, NCP data management, and report
management.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
ii Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Related Documentation
Unitrans ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Unified EMS/SNMS of Optical Network
(ZXONM E300 in short) is a set of NE/subnet layer network management
system based on Windows 2000 and Unix platforms. On the basis of
guaranteeing hardware functions of transmission equipment, it manages
and controls system NEs and regional networks, providing such functions
as system management, configuration management, performance
management, fault management, security management, and maintenance
management.
1. Management scope of ZXONM E300 (V3.19)
SDH equipment: ZXMP S390, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S360, ZXMP S320,
ZXMP S330, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S100, ZXMP S200, ZXMP S325
DWDM equipment: ZXWM-32 (V1), ZXWM M900, ZXMP M800,
ZXMP M720
CWDM equipment: ZXMP M600
PCM equipment: ZXMP P210, ZXMP P220, ZXMP P230, ZXMP P240
2. Manual suite
Manual Name Function
Unitrans ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Unified
EMS/SNMS of Optical Network Installation
Manual
It describes the basic knowledge and
installation process of ZXONM E300.
Unitrans ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Unified
EMS/SNMS of Optical Network Interface
Manual
It is an electrical manual, which describes
the operations of ZXONM E300 client/
server interfaces.
Unitrans ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Unified
EMS/SNMS of Optical Network Operation
Manual
It includes several volumes which describe
the operations commonly used in ZXONM
E300 in details.
Unitrans ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Unified
EMS/SNMS of Optical Network LCT Users
Manual
It describes the installation and
configuration of the ZXONM E300 LCT
(Local Craft/maintenance Terminal).
Unitrans ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Unified
EMS/SNMS of Optical Network Maintenance
Manual
It describes the maintenance knowledge of
ZXONM E300.

About this Manual
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION iii
Conventions
Typographical Conventions
ZTE documents employ the following typographical conventions.
TAB L E 1 TYPOGRAPHI CAL CONVENTI ONS
Typeface Meaning
Italics References to other guides and documents.
Quotes Links on screens.
Bold Menus, menu options, input fields, radio button names, check
boxes, drop-down lists, dialog box names, window names
CAPS Keys on the keyboard and buttons on screens and company
name.
Cons t ant wi dt h
Text that you type, program code, files and directory names,
and function names
[ ] Optional parameters
{ } Mandatory parameters
| Select one of the parameters that are delimited by it

Note: Provides additional information about a certain topic.

Checkpoint: Indicates that a particular step needs to be
checked before proceeding further.

Tip: Indicates a suggestion or hint to make things easier or
more productive for the reader.
Mouse Operation Conventions
TAB L E 2 MOUSE OPERATI ON CONVENTI ONS
Typeface Meaning
Click Refers to clicking the primary mouse button (usually the left
mouse button) once.
Double-click Refers to quickly clicking the primary mouse button (usually the
left mouse button) twice.
Right-click Refers to clicking the secondary mouse button (usually the right
mouse button) once.
Drag Refers to pressing and holding a mouse button and moving the
mouse.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
iv Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Safety Signs
TAB L E 3 SAFETY SI GNS
Safety Signs Meaning

Danger: Indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which if
not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. This signal
word should be limited to only extreme situations.

Warning: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if
not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Caution: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not
avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. It may also
be used to alert against unsafe practices.

Erosion: Beware of erosion.

Electric shock: There is a risk of electric shock.

Electrostatic: The device may be sensitive to static electricity.

Microwave: Beware of strong electromagnetic field.

Laser: Beware of strong laser beam.

No flammables: No flammables can be stored.

No touching: Do not touch.

No smoking: Smoking is forbidden.
Other Convention
In this manual, both the words card and board are used to refer to
circuit board.

About this Manual
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION v
How to Get in Touch
The following sections provide information on how to obtain support for
the documentation and the software.
Customer Support
If you have problems, questions, comments, or suggestions regarding
your product, contact us by e-mail at support@zte.com.cn. You can also
call our customer support center at (86) 755 26771900 and (86) 800-
9830-9830.
Documentation Support
ZTE welcomes your comments and suggestions on the quality and
usefulness of this document. For further questions, comments, or
suggestions on the documentation, you can contact us by e-mail at
doc@zte.com.cn; or you can fax your comments and suggestions to (86)
755 26772236. You can also explore our website at
http://support.zte.com.cn, which contains various interesting subjects like
documentation, knowledge base, forum and service request.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
vi Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION













This page is intentionally blank.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 1
PART A
Configuration Operations

In this part, you will get a comprehensive understanding about the
configuration operations of ZXONM E300.
PART A includes the following five chapters:
Chapter 1 Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration
This chapter describes the networking flow of the SDH service with a
networking example, helping users understand the whole process of
Networking Analysis -> Configuration -> Site Commissioning.
Chapter 2 Circuit Service Configuration
This chapter describes the configuration flows of various circuits. In
addition, this chapter illustrates the creation of the PDH circuit with a
networking example.
Chapter 3 Ethernet Service Configuration
This chapter describes the configuration flows of all kinds of Ethernet
services. In addition, this chapter illustrates the creation of the VLAN
with a networking example.
Chapter 4 ATM Service Configuration
This chapter describes the configuration flow of the ATM service. In
addition, this chapter illustrates the creation of the ATM service with a
networking example.
Chapter 5 Common SDH Management Operations
This chapter describes common SDH NE management functions.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
2 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION













This page is intentionally blank.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 3
Ch a p t e r 1
Traditional SDH Service
Networking Configuration

This chapter describes the configuration flow of establishing a transmission
network with ZXONM E300. In addition, an example of SDH service
networking is included to describe the operation steps and methods.
Configuration Flow
The networking configuration with ZXONM E300 has two typical flows
according to the NEs online or offline statuses.
Note:
Online status indicates that the NE configuration commands are sent at real-
time to the NCP board, and are forwarded to the corresponding board by NCP
board.
Offline status indicates that the NE configuration commands are only saved in
the EMS database and are not sent to the NCP board, since the NE is offline.
Networking flow of online NEs
The networking flow of online NEs is listed in Table 4.
TAB L E 4 NETWORK I NG FL OW OF ONL I NE NES
Step Description Menu
1 Create online NEs
Device Config -> Create NE (select the NeState as
Online)
2 Install the boards Device Config -> NE Config -> Open NE
3 Connect NEs
Device Config -> Common Management -> Link
Management
4 Configure timeslots
Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service
Config

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
4 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Step Description Menu
5
Configure clock
sources
Device Config -> SDH Management -> Clock
Source
6
Configure orderwire
services
Device Config -> Common Management -> Order
Wire

N
Extract the NCP
time
Maintenance -> Time Management
Networking flow of offline NEs
The networking flow of offline NEs is listed in Table 5.
TAB L E 5 NETWORK I NG FL OW OF OFFL I NE NES
Step Description Menu
1 Create offline NEs
Device Config -> Create NE (select the NeState
as Offline)
2 Install the boards Device Config -> NE Config -> Open NE
3 Connect NEs
Device Config -> Common Management ->
Link Management
4 Configure timeslots
Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service
Config
5 Configure clock sources
Device Config -> SDH Management -> Clock
Source
6
Configure orderwire
services
Device Config -> Common Management ->
Order Wire

N-2
Modify NE status to
Online
Device Config -> NE Config -> NE Property
N-1 Download NE data
System -> NCP Data Management -> DB
Download
N Extract the NCP time Maintenance -> Time Management
Note: Some other configurations may need to be performed in the EMS
according to actual networking requirement and equipment type:
If the network needs MS protection, configure MS protection before configuring
timeslots.
If the network needs Ethernet or ATM service, configure them. For detailed
configuration, refer to Chapter 3 and Chapter 4.
If the equipment has special requirement for configuration, e.g. ZXMP S330
needs 1:N protection for boards, make corresponding configurations in EMS via
selecting Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Setting 1:N Card Switching.
If EMS manages the transmission equipment by Data Communication Network
(DCN), the gateway NE can be employed to establish the communication
relationship between EMS and the managed equipment. For detailed operations,
refer to Configure Gateway NE in Chapter 5.

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 5
Configuration Example
In this section, you will learn about the configuration of traditional SDH
services with a networking example for offline NEs.
Networking Configuration
Suppose there are six NEs: A, B, C, D, E and F. The network consisting of
them is illustrated in Figure 1.
FI GURE 1 NETWORK I NG DI AGRAM

Service requirements are listed as follows:
As the access network element and network head, NE A is accessed to
the EMS terminal (ZXONM E300), providing the clock for the whole
network.
Traffic assignments:
Between NE A and NE B: eight STM-1 optical signal services
Between NE A and NE C: eight STM-1 optical signal services
Between NE A and NE D: eight STM-1 optical signal services
Between NE E and NE F: fifty 2 M bidirectional services
Orderwire phone is needed among all the NEs;
NE A, B, C and D form a two-fiber bidirectional MS protection ring;
NE D and E form a four-fiber 1+1 MS protection link.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
6 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Networking Analysis and Service
Configuration
According to the network transmission rate presented above, determine
the type of transmission equipment as listed in Table 6.
TAB L E 6 TYPE OF EQUI PMENT AND SERVI CE BOARDS
NE Equipment Type
A, B, C, D ZXMP S390
E ZXMP S380
F ZXMP S360
Then determine the type and quantity of all boards in each NE according
to service requirements and the capacity of service boards.
Table 7, Table 8 and Table 9 respectively list the board configurations of
ZXMP S390, ZXMP S380, and ZXMP S360.
TAB L E 7 BOA RD CONFI GURATI ON OF ZXMP S390 ( NE A, B, C, AND D)
Board Board Quantity
Type Function NE A NE B NE C NE D
NCP Controls the NE 1 1 1 1
SC Assigns the clock, supports 1+1 warm backup 2 2 2 2
OW Provides the orderwire phone function 1 1 1 1
CSE
Performs the space-division cross-connect,
supports 1+1 warm backup
2 2 2 2
OL64 Provides 10 Gbit/s optical signal 2 2 2 2
OL16 Provides 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal - - 1 2
OL18 Provides STM-1 optical signal 3 1 1 1
TAB L E 8 BOA RD CONFI GURATI ON OF ZXMP S380 ( NE E)
Board Board Quantity
Type Function NE E
NCP Controls the NE 1
SC Assigns the clock, supports 1+1 warm backup 2
OW Provides the orderwire phone function 1
CSA
Performs the space-division cross-connect, supports
1+1 warm backup
2
OL16 Provides 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal 2
ET1 Provides 2 Mbit/s service 1

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 7
TAB L E 9 BOA RD CONFI GURATI ON OF ZXMP S360 ( NE F)
Board Board Quantity
Type Function NE F
NCP Controls the NE 1
SC Assigns the clock, supports 1+1 warm backup 2
OW Provides the orderwire phone function 1
CSA
Performs the space-division cross-connect, supports
1+1 warm backup
2
OI16 1
LP16
One OI16 board works together with two LP16 boards
to provide one channel of 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal
2
EP1A Provides 2 Mbit/s service 1
Based on the networking requirement, assign the IP addresses to each NE
and the EMS computer listed in Table 10.
TAB L E 10 L A YOUT OF I P ADDRESS FOR EACH NE AND THE EMS COMPUTER
Equipment I P Address Mask
NE A 193.55.1.18 255.255.255.0
NE B 193.55.2.18 255.255.255.0
NE C 193.55.3.18 255.255.255.0
NE D 193.55.4.18 255.255.255.0
NE E 193.55.5.18 255.255.255.0
NE F 193.55.6.18 255.255.255.0
EMS computer 193.55.1.5 255.255.255.0
Since NE A is directly connected with the EMS computer so the IP address of the
EMS computer should be in the same network segment with that of the NE A
Connecting EMS and NE
[Purpose]
Establish the communication between EMS and NE.
[Steps]
1. Connect the network port of EMS computer with the Qx port which lies
in the interface area of NE A.
2. Modify the IP address, mask and gateway address of EMS computer as
193.55.1.5, 255.255.255.0, 193.55.1.18 respectively.
3. Add the routing on the EMS computer in order to access other NEs.
i. Click Start -> Run in the EMS computer and go to Run dialog box.
ii. Input cmd in the Run dialog box and go to cmd Window.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
8 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
iii. Input following commands in the cmd Window to add the routing
information in order to access other NEs.
r out e add 193. 55. 2. 0 mas k 255. 255. 255. 0 193. 55. 1. 18
r out e add 193. 55. 3. 0 mas k 255. 255. 255. 0 193. 55. 1. 18
r out e add 193. 55. 4. 0 mas k 255. 255. 255. 0 193. 55. 1. 18
r out e add 193. 55. 5. 0 mas k 255. 255. 255. 0 193. 55. 1. 18
r out e add 193. 55. 6. 0 mas k 255. 255. 255. 0 193. 55. 1. 18

Cautions: After EMS computer is rebooted, the routings added above will
be lost. If the permanent routings are expected in the computer, the command of
r out e add- p should be used instead of r out e add.
[Result]
After creating the NE according to the steps described in Creating NE later,
Ping NEs IP address on the EMS computer, then the NE can be pinged
through.
Creating NE
[Purpose]
Create NE A, B, C, D, E, and F.
[Steps]
Select the menu item Device Config -> Create NE in the main view of
the client operation window, and the Create NE dialog box pops up.
In the dialog box, enter or select the configuration information as listed in
Table 11 into corresponding items.
TAB L E 11 NE I NFORMATI ON
NE
Parameter
A B C D E F
NE Name A B C D E F
NE I D 51 52 53 54 55 56
NE Address 193.55.1.18 193.55.2.18 193.55.3.18 193.55.4.18 193.55.5.18 193.55.6.18
System Type
ZXMP
S380/S90
ZXMP
S380/S390
ZXMP
S380/S390
ZXMP
S380/S390
ZXMP
S380/S390
ZXMP S360
Device Type ZXMP S390 ZXMP S390 ZXMP S390 ZXMP S390 ZXMP S380 ZXMP S360
NE Type ADM&REG ADM&REG ADM&REG ADM&REG TM TM
Speed STM-64 STM-64 STM-64 STM-64 STM-16 STM-16

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 9
NE
Parameter
A B C D E F
NeState Offline Offline Offline Offline Offline Offline
Auto-Link Auto-Link Auto-Link Auto-Link Auto-Link Auto-Link Auto-Link
Set Shelf Main shelf Main shelf Main shelf Main shelf Main shelf Main shelf
No extended subrack is configured in this project. Therefore, use the default
system configuration.
Login password for NE can be set if necessary.
keep the default settings for those parameters not listed in this table such as
Collect History Performance Periodically and Auto Synchronize Time.

Note: NE address and NE ID should be same with the configurations in NCP.
For the configurations of the address and ID of NCP board refer to Unitrans ZXONM
E300(V3.19) Unified EMS SNMS of Optical Network Operation Manual(Volume IV)
Agent Configuration.
For example, to create NE A, Figure 2 shows the Create NE dialog box.
FI GURE 2 CREATE NE DI AL OG BOX ( FOR NE A)

[Result]
After inputting all the parameters about the NE, click the Apply button
and the NE is created successfully. The icon of NE A is displayed in the
client operation window, as shown in Figure 3.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
10 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 3 CL I ENT OPERATI ON WI NDOW WI TH NE A CREATED

Create other NEs with the same procedures.
Check the information of the NE created in the NE Property dialog box
and make sure the parameters are same as those you have entered.
Tip:
To access the NE Property dialog box, select the NE in the client operation
window, and then perform any one of the following operations:
Select the menu item Device Config -> NE Config -> NE Property;
Click the button on the toolbar;
Right-click the NE icon and select the NE Property menu item in the pop-up
shortcut menu.
Installing Board
[Purpose]
Install boards for each NE according to Table 7, Table 8 and Table 9.
[Steps]
Double-click the NE icon in the topology to pop up Card Management
dialog box, as shown in Figure 4.

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 11
FI GURE 4 CARD MANAGEMENT DI AL OG BOX
A


Note: Select the Presetting check box before installing CS board, as shown
in Figure 4. And then select the board type and time division module (TCS module)
in the advanced property dialog box according to Table 8 and Table 9.
[Result]
After installation, double-click the NE icon again and chech whether the
right boards are installed in the simulative rack in the Card Management
dialog box.
The simulative rack of NE A is shown in Figure 5.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
12 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 5 SI MUL ATI VE RACK OF NE A

The simulative rack of NE B is shown in Figure 6.
FI GURE 6 SI MUL ATI VE RACK OF NE B

The simulative rack of NE C is shown in Figure 7.

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 13
FI GURE 7 SI MUL ATI VE RACK OF NE C

The simulative rack of NE D is shown in Figure 8.
FI GURE 8 SI MUL ATI VE RACK OF NE D

The simulative rack of NE E is shown in Figure 9.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
14 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 9 SI MUL ATI VE RACK OF NE E

The simulative rack of NE F is shown in Figure 10.
FI GURE 10 SI MUL ATI VE RA CK OF NE F

Establishing Connection
[Purpose]
Establish optical links between NEs.

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 15
[Steps]
1. Select all the NEs in the client operation window, and select the menu
item Device Config -> Common Management -> Link
Management to pop up Link Management dialog box, as shown in
Figure 11.
FI GURE 11 L I NK MANAGEMENT DI AL OG BOX ( WI THOUT OPTI CAL L I NK S)


2. In the Link Management dialog box, establish optical links according
to the connection relations listed in Table 12.
TAB L E 12 L I NK CONFI GURATI ON
SN Start End Destination End Connection Type
1 NE A: OL64[1-1-6], Port 1
NE B: OL64[1-1-3], Port
1
Bidirectional optical
link
2 NE B: OL64[1-1-6], Port 1
NE C: OL64[1-1-3], Port
1
Bidirectional optical
link
3 NE C: OL64[1-1-6], Port 1
NE D: OL64[1-1-3], Port
1
Bidirectional optical
link
4 NE D: OL64[1-1-6], Port 1
NE A: OL64[1-1-3], Port
1
Bidirectional optical
link
NE D: OL16[1-1-1], Port 1
NE E: OL16[1-1-3], Port
1
Bidirectional optical
link
5
NE D: OL16[1-1-2], Port 1
NE E: OL16[1-1-12], Port
1
Bidirectional optical
link
6 NE C: OL16[1-1-1], Port 1
NE F: OI16[1-1-5], Port
1
Bidirectional optical
link


ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
16 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
[Result]
1. After establishing all optical links, there should be green lines among NE
icons in the topology, as shown in Figure 12.
FI GURE 12 TOPOL OGY WI TH OPTI CAL L I NK S


2. Select all the NEs and click the menu item Device Config ->
Common Management -> Link Management in the client operation
window. Check optical links in the pop-up Link Management dialog
box as shown in Figure 13.

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 17
FI GURE 13 L I NK DI AL OG BOX ( WI TH ESTAB L I SHED OPTI CAL L I NK S)

Configuring Two-fiber Bidirectional MSP
Ring
[Purpose]
Configure two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.
[Steps]
1. Select the NEs to be configured with MSP in the client operation
window, and select the menu item Device Config -> Common
Management -> MS Protection to pop up the MS Protection
Config dialog box, as shown in Figure 14.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
18 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 14 MS PROTECTI ON CONFI G DI AL OG BOX


2. Configure the MSP group
i. Click New. button in the MS Protection Config dialog box to pop
up MS Group Config dialog box as shown in Figure 15.
FI GURE 15 MS GROUP CONFI G DI AL OG BOX

ii. Set the parameters of the two-fiber bidirectional MSP group
according to Table 13.

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 19
TAB L E 13 CONFI GURATI ON OF TWO- FI B ER BI DI RECTI ONAL MSP GROUP
I tem Configuration
MS Group ID 1
MS Group Name 1
MS Group Type SDH Two-Fiber Bi-Dir MS ring (No Extra Service)
iii. Click OK button in the MS Group Config dialog box to return to the
MS Protection Config dialog box as shown in Figure 16, where the
MS Group List displays the configured two-fiber bidirectional MSP
ring.
FI GURE 16 MS PROTECTI ON CONFI G DI AL OG BOX

iv. Add NE A, B, C, and D to the MS group 1 in the MS Group & NE
Tree list box, and sort the NEs as A, B, C, and D from top to
bottom, as shown in Figure 17.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
20 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 17 MS PROTECTI ON CONFI G DI AL OG BOX ( WI TH NES ADDED)

v. Click Apply button to confirm the configuration, and a pop up
screen will message the successful MSP configuration.
3. Configure the APS ID
i. Select the MS group 1 in the MS Group List in the MS Protection
Config box, and click the Next button to enter the APS ID Config
dialog box, as shown in Figure 18.
ii. In this configuration example, use the default values.
FI GURE 18 APS I D CONFI G DI AL OG BOX

4. Configure the MSP relationship
i. Click Next button in the APS ID Config dialog box shown in Figure
18 to enter the MS Protection dialog box.

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 21
ii. Establish the connections between Port 1 of 3# OL64 boards boards
of NE A, B, C and D.

Note: Such connection means that for each NE, the last 32 AUG units on the
3# OL64 board protect the first 32 AUG units of the 6# OL64 board; while the last
32 AUG units on the 6# OL64 board protect the first 32 AUG units on the 3# OL64
board.

5. Start the APS
i. Select NEs A, B, C, and D in the client operation window. Then select
Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> MS Protection Group APS
Operation to enter the APS Operation dialog box, as shown in
Figure 19.
FI GURE 19 APS OPERATI ON DI AL OG BOX

ii. Click All Start button in the MS protection group APS operation
dialog box to start the APS protocol processor of all the selected NEs.
iii. Click Apply button in Figure 19 to validate the ASP operation.
[Result]
Take NE A as an example.
After configuring two-fiber MS ring select NE A and the menu item Device
Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config in the client operation
window to open the Service Config dialog box.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
22 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 20 SERVI CE CONFI G DI AL OG BOX OF NE A

The last 32 AUG units on the 3# OL64 board and on the 6# OL64 board of
NE A are gray and cannot be configured.
The W-1 is displayed in each button of the first 32 AUG units, indicating
that these are working paths; while the P-1 is displayed in each button
of the last 32 AUG units, indicating that these are protection paths, as
shown in Figure 20.
Configuring Four-fiber 1+1 MSP Link
[Purpose]
Configure the four-fiber 1+1 MSP link.
[Steps]
1. Select the NEs to be configured with MSP in the client operation
window, and click the menu item Device Config -> Common
Management -> MS Protection to pop up the MS Protection
Config dialog box, as shown in Figure 14.
2. Configure the MSP group
This step is similar to the configuration of two-fiber bidirectional MSP
ring. Refer to step 2 in the section of Configuration of Two-fiber
Bidirectional MSP Ring. The configuration parameters are listed in
Table 14.
TAB L E 14 CONFI GURATI ON OF FOUR- FI B ER 1+1 MSP L I NK
I tem Configuration
MS Group ID 2
MS Group Name 2

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 23
I tem Configuration
MS Group Type SDH Four-Fiber Bi-Dir 1+1 MS link
NEs included in the MS group NE D, E
Protection order No requirement
3. Configure the MSP relationship
Refer to step 4 in the section of Configuration of Two-fiber Bidirectional
MSP Ring. The configuration parameters are listed in Table 15.
TAB L E 15 MSP REL ATI ONSHI P CONFI GURATI ON
NE Name Working Unit Protection Unit
NE D Port 1 of 1# OL16 board Port 1 of 2# OL16 board
NE E Port 1 of 3# OI16 board Port 1 of 12# OI16 board

4. Start the APS
i. Select NE D and NE E in the client operation window.
ii. Select Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> MS Protection Group APS
Operation to enter the MS protection group APS operation
dialog box, and start the APS protocol processor in it.

[Result]
Take NE E as an example.
After the four-fiber 1+1 MSP link has been configured, select NE E and
then select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management ->
Service Config in the client operation window to open the Service
Config dialog box, as shown in Figure 21.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
24 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 21 SERVI CE CONFI G DI AL OG BOX OF NE E


All the AUG units on the 12# OL16 board of NE E are gray and cannot be
configured, and the P-1 is displayed in each AUG button, indicating that
these are protection paths.
All the AUG units on the 3# OL16 board of NE E are configurable, and the
W-1 is displayed in each AUG button, indicating that these are working
paths, as shown in Figure 21.
Configuring Service
[Purpose]
Configure STM-1 optical bidirectional service and 2 M bidirectional service.
The traffic requirements between NEs are listed in Table 16.
TAB L E 16 TRAFFI C REQUI REMENTS
Service Type Source NE Destination NE
Number of
Services
NE B 8
NE C 8
Bidirectional STM-1 optical
service
NE A
NE D 8
Bidirectional 2 M service NE E NE F 20

[Steps]
1. Select all the NEs in the client operation window.
2. Select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management ->
Service Config to pop up the Service Config dialog box.

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 25
3. Configure the timeslots of each NE according to Table 17 to Table 27.
All the configurations are bidirectional.
Timeslot configuration of NE A
TAB L E 17 TI MESL OT CONFI GURATI ON OF NE A
Optical I nterface Board
(Tributary)
Optical Interface Board (Aggregate)
Board
Port
AUG AU4
Board Port AUG AU4
OL1[1-1-10] 1 - 8 3# OL64 1 1 - 8
OL1[1-1-11] 1 - 8 6# OL64 1 1 - 8
OL1[1-1-12] 1 - 8 6# OL64 1 9 - 16
Timeslot configuration of NE B.
TAB L E 18 TI MESL OT CONFI GURATI ON OF NE B ( 1)
Optical I nterface Board
(Tributary)
Optical I nterface Board
(Aggregate)
Board
Port AUG
AU4
Card Port
AUG
AU4
OL1[1-1-10] 1 - 8 OL64[1-1-3] 1 1 - 8
TAB L E 19 TI MESL OT CONFI GURATI ON OF NE B ( 2)
Optical I nterface Board
(Aggregate)
Optical I nterface Board
(Aggregate)
Board Port
AUG
AU4
Board Port
AUG

AU4
OL64[1-
1-3]
1 9 - 16 OL64[1-1-6] 1 1 - 8
Timeslot configuration of NE C
TAB L E 20 TI MESL OT CONFI GURATI ON OF NE C ( 1)
Optical I nterface Board
(Tributary)
Optical I nterface Board
(Aggregate)
Board
Port AUG
AU4
Board Port
AUG
AU4
OL1[1-1-10] 1 - 8 OL64[1-1-3] 1 1 - 8

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
26 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
TAB L E 21 TI MESL OT CONFI GURATI ON OF NE C ( 2)
Optical I nterface Board (Tributary)
Board
Port
AUG AU4
TUG3 TUG2 TU12
1 1 - 7 1 - 21
2 1 - 7 1 - 21
1 1 - 3
2 1 - 3
OL16[1-1-1] 1
3
3 1 - 2
TAB L E 22 TI MESL OT CONFI GURATI ON OF NE C ( 3)
Optical Interface Board (Aggregate)
Board Port
AU
AU4
TUG3 TUG2 TU12
1 1 - 7 1 - 21
2 1 - 7 1 - 21
1 1 - 3
2 1 - 3
OL64[1-1-6] 1 1
3
3 1 - 2
Timeslot configuration of NE D
TAB L E 23 TI MESL OT CONFI GURATI ON OF NE D ( 1)
Optical I nterface Board
(Tributary)
Optical Interface Board (Aggregate)
Board
Port AUG
AU4
Board Port AUG AU4
OL1[1-1-10] 1 - 8 OL64[1-1-6] 1 1 - 8
TAB L E 24 TI MESL OT CONFI GURATI ON OF NE D ( 2)
Optical I nterface Board (Tributary)
Board
Port AUG
AU4
TUG3 TUG2 TU12
1 1 - 7 1 - 21
2 1 - 7 1 - 21
1 1 - 3
2 1 - 3
OL16[1-1-1] 1
3
3 1 - 2

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 27
TAB L E 25 TI MESL OT CONFI GURATI ON OF NE D ( 3)
Optical Interface Board (Aggregate)
Board Port AUG AU4 TUG3 TUG2 TU12
1 1 - 7 1 - 21
2 1 - 7 1 - 21
1 1 - 3
2 1 - 3
OL64[1-
1-3]
1 1
3
3 1 - 2
Timeslot configuration of NE E
TAB L E 26 TI MESL OT CONFI GURATI ON OF NE E
Tributary Board Optical I nterface Board
Board
2 M
(VC12)
Board
Port
AUG
AU4
TUG3 TUG2 TU12
1 1 - 7 1 - 21
2 1 - 7 1 - 21
1 1 - 3
2 1 - 3
ET1[1-1-
8]
1 - 50
OL16[1-
1-3]
1
3
3 1 - 2
Timeslot configuration of NE F
TAB L E 27 TI MESL OT CONFI GURATI ON OF NE F
Tributary Board Optical I nterface Board
Board
2 M
(VC12)
Board
Port
AUG
AU4
TUG3 TUG2
TU1
2
1 1 - 7 1 - 21
2 1 - 7 1 - 21
1 1 - 3
2 1 - 3
EP1A[1-
1-13]
1 - 50
OI16[1-1-
5]
1
3
3 1 - 2
[Result]
Select all the NEs in the client operation window, and then select the menu
item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config to pop up
the Service Config dialog box.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
28 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Query timeslot connections and check whether they are in compliance with
the configurations listed in Table 17 to Table 27.
Configuring Clock Source
[Purpose]
Configure the networking clock source and the Compatibility.
The clock source configuration includes the configuration of clock source
and compatibility.
Configuration Principles:
Clock source configuration
Ensure that the SDH network has only one clock source and the clocks
do not make a loop.
Compatibility configuration
The network shown in Figure 1 consists of ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390,
and ZXMP S360 NEs. Since ZXMP S380 and ZXMP S390 belong to the
same system type of ZXMP S380/S390, it is only necessary to enable
the compatibility of optical interfaces connecting ZXMP S390 and ZXMP
S360.
[Steps]
To configure clock source
1. Select all NEs in the client operation window, and select the menu item
Device Config -> SDH Management -> Clock Source to pop up the
Clock Source Config dialog box, as shown in Figure 22.
FI GURE 22 CL OCK SOURCE CONFI G DI AL OG BOX



Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 29
2. Select the NEs one by one, and click the New button to configure the
clock source in the Clock Config dialog box for each NE according to
Table 28. The Clock Config dialog box is shown in Figure 23.
TAB L E 28 CL OCK SOURCE CONFI GURATI ON
NE Clock 1 Clock 2 Clock 3 Auto SSM
A
External clock, Port
1, Support Frame
Internal clock -
B
OL64[1-1-3], Port 1,
Extracting Line Clock
OL64[1-1-6], Port 1,
Extracting Line
Clock
Internal
clock

C
OL64[1-1-3], Port 1,
Extracting Line Clock
OL64[1-1-6], Port 1,
Extracting Line
Clock
Internal
clock

D
OL64[1-1-6], Port 1,
Extracting Line Clock
OL64[1-1-3], Port 1,
Extracting Line
Clock
Internal
clock

E
OL16[1-1-3], Port 1,
Extracting Line Clock
OL16[1-1-12], Port
1, Extracting Line
Clock
Internal
clock

F
OL16[1-1-7], Port 1,
Extracting Line Clock
Internal clock -
FI GURE 23 CL OCK CONFI G DI AL OG BOX

To configure the compatibility
1. In Figure 22, click the Compatible tab to enter the Compatible page.
2. Double-click NE C in the left Resource area, and then click Auto
button to set the compatibility, as shown in Figure 24.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
30 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 24 COMPATI B L E PAGE OF THE CL OCK SOURCE DI AL OG BOX

The setting in Figure 24 indicates that the compatibility of port 1 on
1#OL16 board of NE C is enabled.
[Result]
1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and then click the menu
item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Clock Source. Make
sure that the clock configurations of each NE are in compliance with
those listed in Table 28
2. Click the Compatible tab. Make sure that the compatibility information
is in compliance with the above setting.
Configuring the Orderwire
[Purpose]
Set orderwire numbers of the network and avoid OW loop.
[Steps]
1. Set the OW number
i. Select an NE in the client operation window, and then click the
menu item Device Config -> Common Management -> Order
Wire to pop up the OW dialog box.
ii. Click AutoSet button to pop up a query dialog box as shown in
Figure 25.

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 31
FI GURE 25 OW AUTO- SET DI AL OG BOX

iii. Click Yes button in Figure 25 to pop up another query dialog box as
shown in Figure 26.
FI GURE 26 AUTO CREATE OW NUMB ER DI AL OG BOX

iv. Click Yes button, and then a auto-set OW number will be create.
v. Click Apply button in the OW dialog box to save and forward the
configured OW number.
2. To set OW control point
i. In the client operation window, select NE A, click the menu item
Device Config-> Common Management-> Order Wire to pop
up OW dialog box.
ii. Select the OW Protect radio button in the Control Point area to
make the selected NE (NE A) as the control point NE. The default
setting of Order in the spin box is 1 which is adopted here.
iii. Click Apply button to confirm the configuration.
3. Set the OW protection bytes
i. Select an NE in the client operation window and then select the
menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Select OW
Protection Byte to pop up the Select OW Protection Byte dialog
box.
ii. In the Select Work Mode area, selct the AutoConfig to activate
the AutoCfg(ParaSet) area.
iii. Select R2C9 in the AutoCfg(ParaSet) area to set the same byte
in all netting for all NEs, as shown in Figure 27.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
32 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 27 SEL ECT OW PROTECTI ON BYTE DI AL OG BOX

iv. Click the Apply button and the OW protection byte of the whole
network is unified as 2C9.
[Result]
1. The OW number in OW dialog box is same with the setting. Click
QueryProtect button, the information displayed in OW Protect
information area is according with the setting, as shown in Figure 28.
FI GURE 28 OW CONFI GURATI ON DI AL OG BOX ( QUERY RESUL T)


Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 33
2. In the Select OW Protection Byte dialog box, each optical interface
should have the OW protection byte of R2C9. Select Verifying in
Select Work Mode area and click Apply button to verify the OW
protection byte in all netting, and then system prompts OW
protection byte of all optical links are configured matchable , as
shown in Figure 29.
FI GURE 29 SEL ECT OW PROTECTI ON BYTE DI AL OG BOX ( VERI FYI NG)

Modifying the NE State
[Purpose]
Modify the state of NE from offline to online.
[Steps]
1. Select an NE in the main view of the client operation window;
2. Select the menu item Device Config -> NE Config -> NE Property to
pop up the NE Property dialog box.
3. Change the NE state from offline to online.
Tip: Right-click an NE icon in the main view of client operation window and
then select Online/Offline item in the shor cut menu.

Note: Before modifying the NEs state, ensure that IP address of EMS
computer and that of the NE are in the same network segment.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
34 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
[Result]
Take NE A as an example. After the NEs state is modified successfully, the
NE A can be pinged successfully in the EMS computer when you execute
the command pi ng 193. 55. 1. 18.
Downloading NE Database
[Purpose]
Download all the configuration data to the NCP board of the NE.
[Steps]
1. Select a online NE in the client operation window.
2. Select the menu item System -> NCP Data Management -> DB
Download to enter the Download DB dialog box, as shown in Figure
30.
3. Download the configured data to the NCP board.
FI GURE 30 DOWNL OAD DB DI AL OG BOX

[Result]
After downloading the configuration data successfully, the equipment can
operate normally.

Chapter 1 - Traditional SDH Service Networking Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 35
Select the NE in the client operation window, and then click the menu item
Maintenance -> Time Management to enter the Time Management
dialog box, which lists the NCP time. If the NCP time is not 0, which
means the EMS communicates with the NE normally and it can supervise
the NE as well.






ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
36 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
This page is intentionally blank.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 37
Ch a p t e r 2
Circuit Service Configuration

This chapter introduces the configuration flow of circuit services in ZXONM
E300. In addition, detailed operation steps and methods are described on
the basis of the networking example in Chapter 1.
Configuration Flow
With the circuit re-discovery function provided by the circuit service
management functional module, the timeslots configured manually can be
used to automatically. create circuits. Users can also create circuits by
themselves.
According to different creation processes, the circuit creation can be
divided into:
Creation of service layer circuits,
Creation of PDH unidirectional/bidirectional circuits,
Creation of broadcast circuits,
Creation of concatenation circuits, and
Creation of data services.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
38 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Service Layer Circuit
Definition
Service layer circuits are service-layer connections, which are the basis
to achieve PDH circuits and broadcast circuits.
Each service layer circuit can be allocated to multiple circuits.
For the service layer circuit created in AU4 multiplexing mode with
the speed E1/E3/DS3/E4, the speed of the circuit is VC4.
For the service layer circuit created in AU3 multiplexing mode with
the speed E1/E3/DS3, the speed of the circuit is VC3.
Creation procedure
Figure 31 describes the work flow of creating the service layer circuit.
FI GURE 31 CREATE THE SERVI CE L AYER CI RCUI T
Determine the circuit speed, direction and priority
Determine the information of ends
Set the routing restriction
(optional)
Set the protection relation
(optional)
Set basic information of the circuit
(such as name, user)
Confirm the creation operation
Issue the configuration data


Chapter 2 - Circuit Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 39
PDH Circuit
Definition
PDH circuits refer to the unidirectional and bidirectional circuits with
the speed E1/E3/DS3/E4.
The VC4 or VC3 service layer path must be created before creating a
PDH circuit.

Creation procedure
Figure 32 describes the work flow of creating PDH circuit.
FI GURE 32 CREATE THE PDH CI RCUI T
Determine the circuit speed, direction and priority of
the PDH circuit
Determine the information of ends
Set the routing restriction
(optional)
Set the protection relation
(optional)
Set basic information of the circuit
(such as name, user)
Confirm the creation operation
Issue the configuration data
Create the service layer circuit
Select the port
(optional)


ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
40 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Broadcast Circuit
Definition
Broadcast circuits refer to point-to-multipoint unidirectional circuits
with the speed of E1/E3/DS3/E4.
A unidirectional service layer path with the speed of VC4 or VC3 must
be created before creating a broadcast circuit.
Creation procedure
1. Create trunk circuit for the broadcast circuit group
FI GURE 33 CREATE TRUNK CI RCUI T
Determine the circuit speed, direction and priority of
the broadcast circuit
Determine the information of ends
Set the routing restriction
(optional)
Set the protection relation
(optional)
Set basic information of the circuit
(such as circuit name, user)
Confirm the creation operation
Issue the configuration data
Create the unidirectional service-layer circuit
Select the port
(optional)
Determine the property of the broadcast circuit group
(create the broadcast group and name it)


Chapter 2 - Circuit Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 41
2. Add tributaries to the broadcast circuit group
FI GURE 34 ADD TRI B UTARI ES

Note: The unidirectional service-layer circuit of the broadcast tributary
circuit and the service-layer circuit of the trunk circuit have the same originating
ends and different terminating ends. Therefore, you only need to determine the
terminating ends of them when determining the ends information.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
42 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Concatenation Circuit
Definition
ZXONM E300 supports unidirectional circuits and bidirectional
concatenation circuits at the rate of VC4-4C, VC4-8C, VC4-16C, VC4-
64C, and VC4-nC (2 n 64).
Creation procedure
Figure 35 describes the work flow of creating the concatenation circuit.
FI GURE 35 CREATE CONCA TENATI ON CI RCUI T
Determine the circuit speed, direction and priority of
the concatenation circuit
Determine the information of ends
Set the routing restriction
(optional)
Set the protection relation
(optional)
Set basic information of the circuit
(such as name, user)
Confirm the creation operation
Issue the configuration data
Select the path



Chapter 2 - Circuit Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 43
Data Service Circuit
Definition
Data service circuits refer to Ethernet service circuits. You may
implement service configuration at the system side by creating
Ethernet service circuits when ZXMP S320, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S360,
ZXMP S380 and ZXMP S390 need to transmit Ethernet services.
Creation procedure
Figure 36 describs the work flow of creating the data service circuit.
FI GURE 36 CREATE DATA SERVI CE CI RCUI T


ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
44 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Configuring PDH Circuit
[Purpose]
Add 2 M circuit service from NE E to NE B in the networking example of
Chapter 1.
[Steps]
1. Configure the board
Add an ET1 board to the slot 2 for NE E and NE B respectively.
2. Start the circuit service management module
i. Select NE E and NE B in the client operation window.
ii. Select the menu item SNMS -> Circuit Service Management to
pop up the Circuit Service Management dialog box.
iii. Select the menu item Circuit Management -> Create to enter
Create Circuit-Speed, Direction, Priority dialog box, as shown
in Figure 37.
FI GURE 37 CREATE CI RCUI T- SPEED, DI RECTI ON, PRI ORI TY DI AL OG BOX

3. Create the service layer circuit where the PDH circuit is located
i. Select SDH E2E for the E2E type, and VC4 Server for the speed.
For the Bi-Dir, as shown in Figure 37.
ii. Click Next button to enter the Create Circuit-Node Information
dialog box.
iii. Select E in the NE A drop-down list box, and B in the NE Z drop-
down list box.
iv. Set the Circuit Num as 1, as shown in Figure 38.

Chapter 2 - Circuit Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 45
FI GURE 38 CREATE CI RCUI T- NODE I NFORMATI ON DI AL OG BOX


Note: In this example, it is unnecessary to set the route restriction,
protection relation and basic information. Just use their default values.
v. Click Complete button to enter the Create Circuit-Affirm dialog
box, as shown in Figure 39.
FI GURE 39 CREATE CI RCUI T- AFFI RM DI AL OG BOX

vi. Click OK button to save the settings and return to the Circuit
Service Management dialog box.
4. Create the PDH-layer circuit
i. In the Circuit Service Management dialog box, select Circuit
Management -> Create to enter the Create Circuit-Speed,
Direction, Priority dialog box in Figure 37.
ii. Select SDH E2E as the E2E type, and E1 as the speed, the Bi-Dir
as the direction.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
46 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
iii. Click Next to enter the Create Circuit-Node information dialog
box.
iv. Select E in the NE A drop-down list box, and B in the NE Z drop-
down list box. And unselect the Auto select port check box, as
shown in Figure 40.
FI GURE 40 CREATE CI RCUI T- NODE I NFORMATI ON DI AL OG BOX

v. Click the Select End button to enter the Select AZ End
Termination dialog box. Select the board ET1[1-1-2] and port 1
for NE E and B respectively, and then click Add, as shown in Figure
41.
FI GURE 41 SEL ECT AZ END TERMI NATI ON DI AL OG BOX


Chapter 2 - Circuit Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 47
vi. Click OK to return to the Create Circuit-Node Information
dialog box.

Note: In this example, it is unnecessary to set the route restriction,
protection relation and basic information. Just use their default values.
vii. Click the Complete button to confirm the configuration.
5. Send configuration data
i. In the Circuit Service Management dialog box, select the menu
item Circuit Management -> Send Circuits Config to enter the
Send Circuits Config dialog box.
ii. Select SendPart in the Send Way drop-down list box of NE E and
B respectively.
iii. Click the Send button to send the configuration data.
[Result]
Select the NE E in the client operation window, and select Maintenance -
> Diagnosis -> Insert Alarm to enter the Insert Alarm dialog box.
Insert an AIS alarm in Port 1 on the ET1[1-1-2] board of NE E.
After sending the command, query the current alarm of the NE B. If Port 1
on the ET1[1-1-2] board reports the AIS alarm, then the service
configuration between NE E and NE B is correct.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
48 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION













This page is intentionally blank.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 49
Ch a p t e r 3
Ethernet Service
Configuration

This chapter introduces the configuration flow of ZXONM E300 for the
transmission of Ethernet services through SDH equipment. In addition, the
detailed configuration procedures of VLAN services are described, based
on a network example composed of ZXMP S320 equipment with SFE4
boards.
Configuration of Ethernet Service
Transparent Transmission
The transparent transmission of Ethernet service is performed by the
transparent transmission Ethernet boards. These boards provide paths for
point-to-point transparent transmission, and bind user ports with VCG
(EOS) ports (i.e. system ports) in a one-to-one way. Data frames are only
forwarded between the user port and the VCG port bound together.
The equipment and boards that support transparent transmission of
Ethernet service are described in Table 29.







ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
50 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
TAB L E 29 TRANSPARENT TRANSMI SSI ON ETHERNET BOARDS
Board
Descriptio
n
Board
I D in
EMS
Board
I D in
equipm
ent/ co
mposin
g
Descripti
on of
User
Ports
Numbe
r of
User
Ports
Nu
mbe
r of
VCG
(EO
S)
Port
s
Soft
ware
/ Har
dwar
e
Versi
on
Applica
ble
Equipm
ent
Gigabit
transparent
transmission
Ethernet
optical board
TGEB
TGE2B-E
1000 M
Ethernet
Optical
Port
2 2 0320
ZXMP
S380
ZXMP
S390
Gigabit
transparent
transmission
Ethernet
optical board
TGEB
TGE2B
1000 M
Ethernet
Optical
Port
2 2 0320
ZXMP
S385
SMB 10/100 M
Ethernet
Electrical
Port
4 4 0310
SMB+TFE
x4
10/100 M
Ethernet
Electrical
Port
4(Electri
cal
port)+4(
Electrical
port)
8 0320
Transparent
Fast
Ethernet
Interface
board
TFE
SMB+TFE
x4B
10/100 M
Ethernet
Electrical
Port+100
M
Ethernet
Optical
Port
4(Electri
cal
port)+4(
Optical
port)
8 2320
ZXMP
S200
TFE board of ZXMP S200 is responsible for managing the Ethernet function
of physical board SMB and the Ethernet plug-in boards. The physical board
SMB can process 8 Ethernet services which can be performed by 4x10/100
M transparent transmission Ethernet electrical ports on the SMB board and
another 4 Ethernet ports on SEC board, TFEX4 board or TFEX4B board.
Among these boards,
The SEC provides 4x10/100 M Ethernet electrical ports (layer 2 switching
supported). TFEx4 provides 4 10/100 M transparent transmission Ethernet
electrical ports. TFEx4B provides 4 100 M transparent transmission
Ethernet optical ports.
TFEx4 and TFEx4B are set in the slot of subrack (slot No. is 11 on EMS).
However, it is not necessary to manually configure the board on the EMS,
because the EMS can automatically set the TFE INTERFACE board in slot
11 based on the version of software and hardware of TFE.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 51
If ZXMP S200 is equipped with SEC, the version of software and hardware
of ZXMP S200 is set as 0330. Moreover, SEC board needs to be added on
the EMS. Detailed configuration information refers to SE Boards in Chapter
3.
Configuring TGEB Board
1. Install boards other than TGEB for the NE
In the client operation window, double-click the NE icon to open the
Card Management dialog box. Install all the functional boards, as
well as optical line board for adding/dropping Ethernet service.
2. Install the TGEB board
i. In the Card Management dialog box, select Presetting check box.
ii. Click TGEB button, the slots area of TGEB board in the simulative
subrack turns into yellow.
iii. Click the slot in yellow, which means add the TGEB board into the
simulative subrack, then Card Property dialog box pops up.
iv. Select the software/hardware version of 0320 in the pop-up Card
Property dialog box. Take ZXMP S380 as example in Figure 42.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
52 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 42 TGEB I NSTAL L ATI ON I NTERFACE


Caution: The software/hardware version cannot be modified in the Card
property dialog box unless the Presetting has been selected. Therefore, make
sure to select the Presetting check box.
3. Configure the advanced property
Click Advanced... button in Card Property dialog box of TGEB board
to go to Advanced... dialog box.
i. Configure the path group
Select Path Group Config page, add AU4 virtual concatenation
according to the Ethernet service capability.
ii. Configure the system port capability
Select Port Capability Config page, assign the path group for
system port.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 53
iii. Configure LCAS
Select LCAS Config page, set if to enable the LCAS function and
configure the timeslot for LCAS function.
iv. Configure the user ports
Select Data Port Attribute page, click or unclick Flow Control
check box according to the requirements of Ethernet service.
4. Configure the service
i. Select the NE that adds/drops Ethernet traffic in client operation
window.
ii. Click the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management ->
Service Config to enter Service Config dialog box.
ii. Establish the connection between the system ports of TGEB board
and the ports of optical line board. When the type of timeslot for
path group is VC4, the unit is 140 M tributary for AU4 virtual
concatenation.
5. Configure the optical line boards of the passed-by site
i. Click a passed-by site in the client operation window
ii. Select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management ->
Service Config.
iii. Establish the pass-through connection for the passed-by optical line
board.
Configuring TFE Board
1. Install boards other than TFE for the NE
In the client operation window, double-click the NE icon to open the
Card Management dialog box. Install all the functional boards, as
well as optical line board for adding/dropping Ethernet traffic.
2. Install the TFE board
i. In the Card Management dialog box, select the Presetting check
box.
ii. Click TFE button, the slot 7 area in the simulative subrack turns
into yellow.
iii. Click the slot in yellow, which means add the board at this slot.
Then, Card Property dialog box pops up.
iv. Select software/hardware version based on the physical board on
the real subrack. The selection principles are listed in Table 30.
TAB L E 30 SEL ECTI ON PRI NCI PL ES OF TFE BOARD
Physical Board Software/ Hardware Version
Subrack without Ethernet Interface
Board
0310
TFEx4 0320

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
54 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Physical Board Software/ Hardware Version
TFEx4B 2320
SEC 0330
Normally, if the hardware version is 0320 or 2320, EMS can automatically
add TFE INTERFACE board into the slot 11.
3. Configure the advanced property
Click Advanced... button in Card Property dialog box of TFE board to
go to the Advanced... dialog box.
i. Configure the working mode
Keep the default setting in the Working Mode page.
ii. Configure data board property
Set IP Address, TPID, JUMBO Configuration and Ping Enable in the
Data Card Property page according to the descriptions in Table
31.
TAB L E 31 DATA PROPERTY OF TFE BOARD
Items Descriptions Remarks
IP address IP address of the board
By remote ping function of the data
board, the IP address is just used to
judge whether the equipment and the
board are normally connected.
TPID
Port VLAN ID of the
board, it is generally
0x8100
When the VLAN processing mode is
TLS access mode at the port of TFE
board, the received frame are added
with VLAN tag including TPID
information.
J UMBO
Configuration
Support or not support
1518 byte J UMBO
frame at the port.
-
Ping Enable
Disable or enable
remote Ping function,
disable by default.
When the ping function is enabled,
ping operation can be executed
between PC computer and board, and
between the boards as well. If PC
computer pings the board, IP
addresses of the computer and the
board should be in the same network
segment, however, ping operation
between the boards has not such
limitation.
4. Configure VCG (EOS) port capability
Select an NE (e.g. ZXMP S200 equipped with TFE board) in the
client operation window, and then click menu item Device Config -
> Ethernet Management -> VCG TS Port Config to configure
the capability of Virtual Concatenation Group (VCG).


Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 55
Note:
If the software/hardware version of TFE is 0310, TFE board provides 4 VCG
(EOS) ports which are corresponding to the 4 user ports of SMB board.
If the software/hardware version is deifferent, TFE board provides 8 VCG (EOS)
ports, among which, the first 4 VCG (EOS) ports are corresponding to the 4 user
ports of SMB board. The last 4 VCG (EOS) ports are corrspongding to the 4 user
ports of TFEx4 board or TFEX4B board.
Configuration principles are as follows.
The maximum bandwidth of VCG (EOS) ports is 10STS-1 (518.4
Mbit/s) in total.
VCG (EOS) port supports virtual concatenation and mapping at VC-
4/VC-3/VC-12 level. Different VCG (EOS) ports can be configured
with different VC containers, but one VCG (EOS) port can only be
configured with the containers in the same level. The regulations
are listed in Table 32.
TAB L E 32 MAPPI NG REGUL ATI ONS OF SYSTEM PORTS I N TFE BOARD
Mapping
Method
Number of Virtual
Concatenation Group
Number of Members
VC-4 1 Supports two VC-4s at most.
VC-3 1-3 Supports ten VC-3s at most.
VC-12 1-63 Supports 210 VC-12s at most.
Generally, LACS, package type, delay time and if to activate the
VCG port adopt the default settings which are bidirectional LACS,
GFP, 0 ms and activate respectively. Currently, TFE does not
support the configurations of delay time and if to activate the VCG
port.
5. Configure the user ports
In the client operation window, select an NE, and then click the menu
item Device Config -> Ethernet Management -> Ethernet
adapter manager. Enable the user ports, and configure the property
of user ports according to the following instructions.
Note: In Ethernet Adapter Manager dialog box, after configurations in
each page are completed, click Apply button to make the changes valid. Otherwise,
the configurations in the previous page will not be saved when the page is shifted
to the other.
i. Configure port property
In the PortProperty page of the Ethernet adapter manager
dialog box, set the speed, duplex mode, flow control method, cross

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
56 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
connect type and if to use the user port. The setting principles are
listed in Table 33. Click Apply button to make the settings valid.
TAB L E 33 PORT PROPERTI ES OF ETHERNET ADAPTER MANAGER DI AL OG BOX
Items Descriptions Remark
If use
If to start the user port. It is a
mandatory item.
The non-used user ports should not
be started.
User ports 1-4 are
corresponding to 1-4
Ethernet interfaces of
physical board SMB.
User ports 5-8 are
corresponding to 1-4
Ethernet interfaces of
TFEx4 board or TFEx4B
board.
Choose
the speed
Choose the speed at user port. It is
a mandatory item.
Ethernet electrical interface
supports AUTO (auto-
negotiation), 10 M and 100 M.
Ethernet optical interface
supports AUTO (auto-
negotiation) and 100 M.
Choose
the
duplex
mode
Choose the duplex mode at user
port. It is a mandatory item.
Ethernet electrical interface and
optical interface both support AUTO
(auto-negotiation) and FULL (full-
duplex), besides, Ethernet electrical
port supports HALF (half-duplex).
Speed and duplex mode of the
docking device and local device
should be consistent with each
other.
For example, the port of the
remote device is set as AUTO,
then that of the local device
should be set as AUTO as well.
Flow
Control
Select the flow control function.
Usually, flow control is used if the
bandwidth at the system side is
lack.
If the bandwidth at the system
side is lack, meanwhile the
docking device and local device
both support and use the flow
control function, the
transmission flow will be
reduced to avoid packet loss.
Cross
connect
type
Select the type of cable for FE
electrical interface; the type
includes MDIX Auto, MDIX
Constraint and MDI Constraint. For
ZXMP S200 V1.00, the type of cable
is MDIX Auto by default.
Two ports are connected with
cable, then,
If configured as MDIX Auto,
the ports can self-negotiate
with both crossover cable
and straight through cable;
if configured as MDIX
Constraint or MDI
Constraint, the ports must
be connected with
crossover cable; if
configured as MDIX and
MDI respectively, the two
ports must be connected
with straight through cable.
If the type of cross connect
and the type of cable are
mismatched, the port will

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 57
Items Descriptions Remark
be in linkdown state.
If the speed and the
working duplex mode are
selected as one of the
constraint modes, the type
of cross connect should be
configured as MDIX
Constraint or MDI
Constraint; if the speed and
the working duplex mode
are selected as auto mode,
the type of cross connect
should be configured as
MDIX Auto. Otherwise, the
service would be
influenced.

ii. Set VLAN mark
In the VLAN Mark page of the Ethernet adapter manager dialog
box, set the parameters of VLAN process mode, PVID, Qos PRI,
transparent port and the port for link transparent according to the
principles listed in Table 34. Click Apply button after configurations
to make them valid.
TAB L E 34 SETTI NGS OF VL AN MARK PA GE OF TFE BOARD
Items Descriptions Remark
VLAN process
mode
Select the VLAN process
mode at user port. For
ZXMP S200 V1.00, the
user port only supports
transparent
transmission mode, for
ZXMP S200 V2.00 or
above version, the user
port supports
transparent
transmission mode and
TLS access mode.
Under the transparent
transmission mode, the user port
and VCG (EOS) should be
corresponding one-to-one, so the
service can be transmitted
transparently between the two
ports.
Under the TLS access mode, no
matter whether the packet
received takes the VLAN label or
not, it will be exchanged after
added VLAN tag according to the
priorities of TPID, PVID and Qos.
If TPID in the VALN label of the
packet is matched with TPID of
the board, the packet will be
transferred after the outmost tag
is stripped; if the TPID in the
VALN tag is not matched with
TPID of the board, the packet will
be transferred directly.
PVID Set VLAN ID from 1 to
4095
This item is valid only if the user port
is under the TLS access mode.
Qos priority Set the priorities of Qos
service from 1 to 8. The
bigger the value is; the
This item is valid only if the user port
is under the TLS access mode.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
58 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Items Descriptions Remark
higher the service
priority is.
Link transport
state
Set if the user port
support link transport
state.
This item is valid only if the user port
is under transparent transmission
mode and the GFP encapsulation
mode is adopted.
For ZXMP S200 V1.00, TFE board only supports transparent transmission
mode.
6. Configure service
i. In the client operation window, select the NE to be configured.
ii. Click the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management ->
Service Config to enter the Service Config dialog box.
iii. Establish the connections between the VCG (EOS) port of TFE board
and the ports of optical line board according to the configuration
method of timeslot cross-connect.
Tip: Another way to enter the Ethernet adapter manager dialog box and
the VCG Port Capacity Config dialog box:
In the Card Management dialog box of ZXMP S200, right-click the TFE board and
its shortcut menu will pop up. Click the corresponding menu items in the shortcut
menu of TFE board.
7. Configure the optical line boards of passed-by sites
i. In the client operation window, select the passed-by NEs one by
one.
ii. Click the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management ->
Service Config to enter the Service Config dialog box. Then
establish the pass-through connection between the passed-by
optical line boards.
Configuration of Smart Ethernet
Board
ZTE provides the following types of smart Ethernet boards: SFE/SGE series
board, and SE board, which are configured in different ways.
Configuring SFE/SGE Series Boards
[Introduction]
The SFE/SGE series boards are listed in Table 35.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 59
TAB L E 35 SFE/ SGE SERI ES BOARDS
Board Name
Board
I D
User Port
Quantity
System Port
Quantity
Applicable
Equipment
Smart Gigabit Ethernet
optical board
SGEB 2 16
Smart Fast Ethernet
electrical interface board
SFE 8 8
ZXMP S380
ZXMP S390
8-port Smart Fast Ethernet
board
SFE8 8 8
4-port Smart Fast Ethernet
board (optical interface)
SFE4B 4 8
ZXMP S360
Smart Fast Ethernet
electrical interface board
SFE 4 6
ZXMP S330
ZXMP S325
4-port Smart Fast Ethernet
board
SFE4 4 8
4-port Smart Fast Ethernet
board (optical interface)
SFE4B 4 4
ZXMP S320

The user ports of SFE series boards are 10/100 M Ethernet interfaces, and
those of SGE series boards are 1000 M Ethernet optical interfaces. Except
the SFE board of ZXMP S330, B in the board ID indicates that the user
ports are optical; otherwise, the user ports are electrical.
The user ports of SFE board in ZXMP S330 and ZXMP S325 support both
10/100 M Ethernet optical interfaces and 10/100 M Ethernet electrical
interfaces. In EMS, these two kinds of Ethernet interfaces have identified
software and hardware version, where 0310 represents for SFE electrical
interface board, and 1310 represents for SFE optical interface board.
The system ports of SFE/SGE series boards adopt the TU12 virtual
concatenation. Each system port has the minimum granularity of 2 M and
the maximum granularity of 100 M.
The SFE/SGE series boards are not produced these days.
[Steps]
1. Install boards other than SFE/SGE for the NE
In the client operation window, double-click the NE icon to open the
Card Management dialog box. Install all the functional boards, as
well as optical line board for adding/dropping Ethernet service.
2. Install SFE/SGE boards for the NE
i. In the Card Management dialog box. Click the button
representing the SFE/SGE series boards, the corresponding slot
color in the simulative subrack turns into yellow.
ii. Click the slot in yellow, which means add the board at this slot.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
60 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Caution: When installing SFE board for ZXMP S330/ZXMP S325, the
software/hardware version cannot be modified in the Card property dialog box
unless the Presetting has been selected. Therefore, make sure to check the
Presetting check box. The SFE electrical interface board with version 0310 is
installed by default.

3. Configure the SFE/SGE series board
Right-click the SFE/SGE series board in the Card Management dialog
box, and select Property in the shortcut menu to enter the Card
Property dialog box.
Then click Advanced button to enter the Advanced dialog box.
i. Configure the user ports
Select Data Port Attribute page, set the property of the user
ports according to the flowchart shown in Figure 43. The
parameters are listed in Table 36.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 61
FI GURE 43 USER PORT CONFI GURATI ON FL OWCHART OF SFE/ SGE BOARD
Enable the user port
Select the Duplex
Mode and Speed
Input the Pvid
Enable the flow
control function
Select the QoS
Priority
Access Mode Trunk Mode
Flow Control
QoS
Set the Self Study MAC,
OutRateLimit, and Trunking
Group
None
Delay Mode
WFQ Mode
The Data Port
Attribute page
Configure another user port?
End
Begin
Yes
No
Select the VLAN
Mode
Determine if to use flow control
or Qos
Select the QoS
Config mode

TAB L E 36 USER PORT CONFI GURATI ON PARAMETERS OF SFE/ SGE BOARD
Parameter Description Remarks
Port Use
State
The type and quantity of user port
is determined by the board type
The port configuration will not
take effect until the port is
enabled.
VLAN Mode
Includes the access mode and the
trunk mode:
Access Mode: The received data
frames carry no VLAN ID. They
are added with a VLAN layer
according to the PVID of this port,
and then are exchanged.
Trunk Mode: The received data
frames must have VLAN mark, and
If the port adopts the access
mode, it is necessary to set the
port speed, duplex mode, and
PVID.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
62 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter Description Remarks
those with no VLAN ID will be
filtered out. The transmit side
does not strip VLAN.
Speed Select work speed for the port.
Duplex
Mode
Select work mode for the port.
The speed of the abutting
equipment should comply with
the duplex mode.
PVID
In access mode, the port will add
VLAN ID to the received data
frame.
Value range from 1 to 4095
Flow Control
Once the flow control of a user
port is enabled:
The flow control should also
be enabled for the port of
user equipment which
connects to this user port.
The flow control should be
enabled for the
corresponding system port
simultaneously.
QoS Priority
Flow control and QoS are two
methods to handle network
congestion. They have
opposite principles and cannot
be used at the same time.
If the system port bandwidth
is less than the corresponding
user port traffic, flow control
is recommended for user port
and system port.
If multiple user ports share
one system port, QoS should
be enabled.
If a user port employs the WFQ
mode of QoS, QoS priority
should be selected. Each QoS
priority corresponds to a
bandwidth ratio, and the
bandwidth is configured in the
system port configuration.
Self Study
MAC
Set if the user port supports self-
study of MAC address. If this
function is disabled, the port has
to obtain the destination address
via the static MAC address
configuration.
It is recommended to enable
this function.
OutRateLimit
Limit the rate of data frames sent
by the user port. There is no limit
by default.
Trunking
Group
Bind all the ports with the same
physical type to one logical port so
as to increase bandwidth capacity
of link, evenly distribute data into
multiple physical links, and protect
links using redundant routes.
It is optional and can be
configured according to service
requirement.

ii. Configure the system ports
Configure the system ports in the Data Port Attribute page, Path
Group Config page, Set Port Capacity page, and LCAS page.
The configuration flowchart is shown in Figure 44, and the
parameters are listed in Table 37.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 63
FI GURE 44 SYSTEM PORT CONFI GURATI ON FL OWCHART OF SFE/ SGE BOARD
Enable the system
port
Input the Pvid
Enable the flow
control function
Determine the relationship
between the QoS Priority and
the WFQ bandwidth allocation
mode
Access Mode
(seldom used)
Trunk Mode
Flow Control
QoS
Set the Self Study MAC and
Trunking Group
None
Delay
Mode
WFQ Mode
Data Port Attribute
page
Configure another system
port?
Begin
Yes
No
Select the
Encapsulation Type
End
Bind TU12 unit as per the
Ethernet traffic capacity
Create a new path
group
Path Group Config
page
Assign path group to the
enabled system port Set Port Capacity
page
LCAS Config page
Select the enabled system
port
Enable the LCAS function?
Select the TU12 unit to be
enabled with the LCAS function
Configure another system
port?
No
Yes
Yes
No
Select the VLAN
Mode
Determine if to use flow control
or QoS
Select the QoS
Config mode


ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
64 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
TAB L E 37 SYSTEM PORT CONFI GURATI ON PARAMETERS OF SFE/ SGE BOARD
Parameter Description Remarks
Port Use
State
The type and quantity of system port is
determined by the board type
The port configuration
will not take effect until
the port is enabled.
VLAN Mode
Includes the access mode and the
trunk mode:
Refer to Table 36.
The trunk mode is
recommended for system
port.
Pvid
In access mode, the port will add VLAN
ID to the received data frame.
Value range: 1 to 4095
Flow
Control
Once the flow control of
a system port is enabled,
the flow control should
be enabled for the
corresponding user port
simultaneously.
QoS Priority
Flow control and QoS are two
methods to handle network
congestion. They have opposite
principles and cannot be used at
the same time.
If the system port bandwidth is
less than the corresponding user
port traffic, flow control is
recommended for user port and
system port.
If multiple user ports share one
system port, QoS should be
enabled.
If a system port employs
the WFQ mode of QoS,
the relationship between
the QoS priority and the
bandwidth must be
configured.
Path Group
Config
Configure VC12 virtual concatenation
group.
Set Port
Capacity
Assign path groups to system ports.
The system ports at both
ends of Ethernet traffic
must have the same
transmission capacity.
Otherwise, the traffic is
blocked.
LCAS Config
LCAS refers to the Link Capacity
Adjustment Scheme. When the
user bandwidth changes, LCAS can
adjust the number of VC paths in a
virtual concatenation group to
prevent traffic interruption or only
cause transient interruption.
When the LCAS is enabled, if a VC
in a path group fails, the system
will automatically delete the invalid
VC, and the remaining normal VCs
can keep transmitting traffic.
When the invalid VC recovers, the
system will add the VC into the
virtual concatenation group.
The LCAS function is
recommended for system
ports.

iii. Configure the board property
In the Data Card Property page, set the running mode and MAC
address of the board. Parameter and configuration principles are
listed in Table 38.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 65
TAB L E 38 PARAMETERS OF SFE/ SGE BOARD PROPERTY
Running Mode
Items Descriptions Remarks
Default
Mode
The port forwards data packets by searching
the MAC address table, thus implements the
arbitrary switching between user ports and
system ports.
Enabling two or more
ports in this mode on a
board may result in
broadcast storm, and
finally result in traffic
failure
Transp
arent
Mode
The MAC address and VLAN are shielded.
The point-to-point transparent transmission
path is provided. Data frames can be
forwarded only between the user port and
the system port that are bound to each
other.
It is similar to the
transparent
transmission by
physical channel,
and can
transparently
transmit various
protocol frames
including 802.1x
frames.
If a board employs
the transparent
mode, the VLAN
mode configuration
of the user port
becomes invalid.
VLAN
Mode
Data frames are forwarded by the assigned
VLAN and by searching the MAC address
table. Traffic between different VLANs is
blocked for the sake of isolation and security.
It can ensure the traffic
security. However, when
the traffic contains a
large number of VLANs,
each VLAN needs to be
configured
independently, which
requires a lot of work.
Virtual
Channe
l Mode
Functions which are similar with
those of VLAN mode:
The frame is transferred by identifying
VLAN and MAC address. The services
among different VLANs can not inter-
communicate, which guarantee the
security and insulation of the service.
Functions which are not similar with
those of VLAN mode:
Virtual channel mode provides a
different way to process the frame.
Under the virtual channel mode, no
matter whether the frame received at
the port carry or not carry VLAN ID, the
board will add a layer of VLAN (that is
QinQ) to the frame; Under the trunk
mode, the frame received at the port
should carry VLAN ID, moreover, the
VLAN ID must be consistent with the
VLAN ID of the port, otherwise, the
frame will be filtrated.

TPID under the virtual
channel mode is 0x88A
which does not support
RSTP.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
66 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Running Mode
Items Descriptions Remarks
MAC Address
Description Remarks
Input the MAC address of the board in
HEX format.
The MAC addresses should be unique
to avoid broadcast storm.

4. Configure VLAN and STP
If the running mode of the Ethernet board is Default Mode or
Transparent Mode, directly follow step 5. Otherwise, follow the
flowchart shown in Figure 45 to configure VLAN and STP. The
parameters are listed in Table 39.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 67
FI GURE 45 VL AN/ STP CONFI GURATI ON FL OWCHART OF SFE/ SGE BOARD
Begin
Create a customer
End
Is there any customer?
Yes
No
Select the NE, click the menu item SNMS ->
Customer Management
Customer
Management dialog box
Select the NE to be configured with VLAN, select the menu item
Device Config -> Ethernet Management -> Configure
Virtual LAN with The Data Card
Click the customer
Click the Add VLAN button
Set the VLAN Name and
VLAN IDs for the VLAN
added
Click the VLAN added
Add user ports and system
ports to the VLAN
Issue and apply the
settings
Enable the STP protocol?
Click the VLAN
Click the BridgeSet
button
Select the card and
enable the STP
No
Yes
Configure Virtual LAN
with The Data Card
diaglog box
BridgeSet dialog box



ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
68 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
TAB L E 39 VL AN/ STP CONFI GURATI ON DESCRI PTI ON OF SFE/ SGE BOARD
Operation Description Configuration Principles
VLAN
configuration
Create a VLAN and
add user ports and
system port to it. This
operation is
mandatory.
The SFE/SGE board can only create
VLAN with sequential IDs in batch.
The VLAN ID of a port must be
identical with the Pvid configured for
the port in the Data Port Attribute
page.
Value range of VLAN ID: 1 to 4095.
However, VLAN IDs from 4078 to
4095 are reserved; do not try to use
them.
STP
configuration
When the Ethernet
traffic becomes a ring
or mesh network, it is
recommended to
configure the STP to
avoid traffic loop.
(Number of VLANs with STP enabled)
30
(Number of VLANs with STP enabled)
(Number of ports) 120

5. Configure the services
i. Select the NE responsible for adding/dropping Ethernet traffic in the
client operation window.
ii. Select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management ->
Service Config to enter the Service Config dialog box.
iii. Establish connection between VC12 path of the Ethernet board and
the TU12 of optical line board using the timeslot cross-connect
configuration method.
6. Configure the optical line board of the passed-by site
i. Select the passed-by site icon in the client operation window, and
then select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -
> Service Config to enter the Service Config dialog box.
ii. Establish pass-through connection with the passed-by optical line
board.
Configuring SE Boards
[Introduction]
The SE boards are listed in Table 40.




Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 69
TAB L E 40 SE BOARDS
Board Name
and
Combination
Board Name
and Version
in EMS
User Port
Quantity
VCG (EOS)
Port
Quantity
Band
width
Applicable
Equipment
SECx48A SE (0320)
8 FE
(electrical)
1 GbE (optical)
SECx48B SE (1320)
8 FE (optical)
1 GbE (optical)
48
1.25
Gbit/s
SECx24A SE (0310)
8 FE
(electrical)
1 GbE (optical)
SECx24B SE (1310)
8 FE (optical)
1 GbE (optical)
24
622
Mbit/s
ZXMP S380
ZXMP S390
SECx48 +
ESFEx8
SE (0320)
8 FE
(electrical)
1 GbE (optical)
SECx48 +
OIS1x8
SE (1320)
8 FE (optical)
1 GbE (optical)
48
1.25
Gbit/s
SECx24 +
ESFEx8
SE (0310)
8 FE
(electrical)
1 GbE (optical)
SECx24 +
OIS1x8
SE (1310)
8 FE (optical)
1 GbE (optical)
24
622
Mbit/s
ZXMP S385
SEC SE (0310)
4 FE
(electrical)
None
518.4
Mbit/s
ZXMP S200

Note:
The processing board of SECx48/SECx24 and the interface board of
ESFEx8/OIS1x8 work together to implement the SEC board of ZXMP S385. The
processing board in inserted in the service functional board area of subrack, while
the interface board is inserted in the service functional interface board area of
subrack.
The board name in EMS refers to the board button name of SEC board in the
Card Management dialog box. The version refers to the software/hardware
version selected in the Card Property dialog box when adding the SEC board.
For ZXMP S200, SEC board transparently transmits/receives the services
to/from the 5-8 VCG (EOS) ports of TFE board via the internal Ethernet ports of
SEC board to achieve layer 2 switching.
[Steps]
1. Install boards other than SE board for the NE
In the client operation window, double-click the NE icon to open the
Card Management dialog box. Install all the functional boards, as
well as optical line board for adding/dropping Ethernet service.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
70 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
2. Install SE boards for the NE
i. In the Card Management dialog box. Click the button representing
for SE board, the corresponding slot in the simulative subrack turns
into yellow.
ii. Click the slot in yellow, which means add the board at this slot.

Caution:
For ZXMP S200, it is necessary to install TFE board with software/hardware
version of 0330 before installing SE board.
The software/hardware version cannot be modified in the Card property
dialog box unless the Presetting has been selected. Therefore, make sure to
check the Presetting check box.
The software version and hardware version must be consistent. Refer to Table
40.
3. Configure the property of SE board
i. Right-click the SE board in the Card Management dialog box, and
select the menu item Property in the shortcut menu to enter the
Card Property dialog box.
ii. Click the Advanced button to enter the Advanced dialog box.
iii. Select Working Mode page and keep default settings.
Caution: Do not modify the settings in the Working Mode page randomly.
iv. Select Data Card Property page to set the properties of the data
board. Parameters are listed in Table 41.
TAB L E 41 PARAMETERS OF SE BOARD PROPERTY
Mac Addr Table Learning
Options Descriptions Remarks
Independent
VLAN
Learning
It is abbreviated as IVL, which means the
MAC address table contains both VLAN ID
and MAC address
Default option.
Shared VLAN
Learning
It is abbreviated as SVL, which means the
MAC address table only contains MAC
address.
Only used for
special
requirement.
TPI D
Options Descriptions Remarks

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 71
0x8810
It is the standard byte
specified by 802.1Q,
and usually is used for
interworking with
equipment from other
manufacturer.
0x88A8
TPID is the ID which identifies the
outmost VLAN layer. It has two
options: 0x8100 and 0x88A8. TPID of
the local device should be consistent
with the TPID of the docking device.
TPID + VLAN ID can implement the
VLAN extended function, where the
TPID and VLAN ID must be the same
as those of the docking port.
It is used for
interworking with the
SFE/SGE series board
which is set to the
Virtual Channel Mode.
Other Parameters
Items Description
IP Address
Set the IP address of the board, which can be configured according
to requirement. By remote ping function of the data board, the IP
address is just used to judge whether the equipment and the board
are normally connected. Hence, IP address has no influence on the
service.
Set MAC
Aging
Set the aging time for MAC address. The default value is 300
seconds. The value can range from 1 second to 30000 seconds.
Generally, keep the default setting.
J UMBO
Configuration
Select if all the ports of board support ultra-long frame longer than
1518 bytes. The default value is Support.
Broadcast
Limit
Configuration
Set whether the board has broadcast limitation or not, the default
setting is Not Limit. Currently, SE board of ZXMP S200 does not
support this function.
Ping Enable
Set whether the board supports Ping function or not, the default
setting is disabled. When the ping function is enabled, ping
operation can be executed between PC computer and board, and
between the boards as well. If PC computer pings the board, IP
addresses of the computer and the board should be in the same
network segment, however, ping operation between the boards has
not this limitation.
LACP Priority
Set LACP priorities of the board. Now, this function is invalid for SE
board.
The LACP protocol will be rejoined if the setting is modified, which
might influence the services, hence, the default setting is
recommended.
Spanning
Tree Protocol
Select spanning tree protocol for the board, only Multi Spanning
Tree Protocol (MSTP) is supported right now.
MSTP
Protocol
Select the configuration state of MSTP, including disable, enable and
relay. The default setting is recommended.
If configured as Enable, MSTP protocol is used
normally, and the board will process the received
message with MSTP protocol;
If configured as Disable, The board will throw away the
received message with MSTP protocol;
If configured as Relay, the board will directly transfer
the received message with MSTP protocol to all of the
ports, which indicates that the MSTP message will not be
restrained by VLAN, so pay more attentions to the
Relay mode in the engineering.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
72 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Use the default value for parameters not described in this table.
4. Configure user ports and VCG (EOS) ports
Select an NE equipped with the SE board in the client operation
window. Click the menu item Device Config -> Ethernet
Management -> Ethernet adapter manager. Enable the user ports
and VCG (EOS) ports, and configure their properties. The configuration
includes the following steps.
i. Configure port properties
Enable and configure user ports and VCG (EOS) ports on the
PortProperty page of Ethernet adapter manager dialog box.
The configuration flowchart of user ports is shown in Figure 46, and
that of system ports is shown in Figure 47. The parameters and
configuration principles are listed in Table 42. For ZXMP S200, it is
necessary to enable and configure user ports and internal Ethernet
ports.
Note: 1-4 internal Ethernet ports of SE board are corresponding to 5-8 VCG
(EOS) ports of TFE board, therefore, the 1-4 internal Ethernet ports and 5-8 VCG
(EOS) ports should be configured. The configurations of VCG (EOS) ports refer to
Configuring TFE Board. The configurations of 1-4 internal Ethernet ports of SE
board are consistent with those of TFE board. The operations of internal Ethernet
ports are similar with those of VCG (EOS) ports.
For ZXMP S200, SE board does not provide VCG (EOS) configuration.
FI GURE 46 CONFI GURATI ON FL OWCHART OF SE BOARD USER PORTS


Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 73
FI GURE 47 CONFI GURATI ON FL OWCHART OF SE BOARD VCG ( EOS) PORTS
Enable the VCG (EOS)
port
Enable the flow control
function?
No
Yes
Enable the flow
control function
Enable the self study
of MAC
Configure another user
port?
End
Begin
No
Yes

TAB L E 42 PORT PROPERTY PARAMETERS OF SE BOARD
Parameter Description Remarks
Port
1-8 user ports are 10/100
M FE electrical or optical
interfaces, with type
determined by the board
type.
User port 9 is a 1000 M
GE optical interface.
VCG (EOS) ports are the
system ports, with
number determined by
the board type.
The configuration related to a
port cannot take effect until the
port is enabled.
Choose The
Speed
Choose the work speed for a
port. The VCG (EOS) port has
a constant speed of 100 M,
which needs no configuration.
Choose The
DuplexMode
Choose the work mode for a
port. The VCG (EOS) port
needs no configuration for
this parameter.
The speed and duplex mode of a
port should be consistent with
those of the adjacent equipment.
Flow Control
Flow control is one solution
for network congestion. If the
system port bandwidth is less
than the corresponding user
port traffic, enabling flow
control for the user port and
system port can prevent
packet loss. This parameter is
optional and is disabled by
default.
Flow control and QoS cannot be
used at the same time.
Once the flow control of a user
port is enabled:
The flow control should also
be enabled for the port of
user equipment which
connects to this user port.
The flow control should be

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
74 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter Description Remarks
enabled for the
corresponding system port
simultaneously.
Self Study
MAC
Set if the user port supports
self-study of MAC address. If
this function is disabled, the
port has to obtain the
destination address via the
static MAC address
configuration.
It is recommended to enable this
function.
Cross
Connect Type
Select the cable type of FE
electrical port, including three
configurations: MDIX Auto,
MDIX Constraint, MID
Constraint.
Two ports are connected with
cable, then,
If configured as MDIX Auto,
the ports can self-negotiate
with both crossover cable
and straight through cable; if
configured as MDIX
Constraint or MDI Constraint,
the ports must be connected
with crossover cable; if
configured as MDIX and MDI
respectively, the ports must
be connected with straight
through cable.
If the type of cross connect
and the type of cable are
mismatched, the port will be
in linkdown state.
If the speed and the working
duplex mode are selected as
one of the constraint modes,
cross connect type should be
configured as constraint
MDIX or constraint MDI; if
the speed and the working
duplex mode are selected as
auto mode, the type of cross
connect should be configured
as MDIX Auto. Otherwise, the
service would be influenced.
ii. Set VLAN Mark
For enabled user ports and VCG (EOS) ports, choose the VLAN
process modes of the ports and set corresponding parameters on
the VLAN Mark page of the Ethernet adapter manager dialog
box.
The flowchart of VLAN mark configuration is shown in Figure 48.
The parameters and their configuration principles are listed in Table
43.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 75
FI GURE 48 VL AN MARK CONFI GURATI ON FL OWCHART OF SE BOARD
Choose the QoS
PRI
Access
Mode
Trunk
Mode
Configure another port?
End
Begin
No
Choose the Process Mode of VLAN
Input the Pvid
TLS
Mode
Set the
TransparentPortID
Choose the Support
for Link Transport
State
Transparent
Mode
Yes

TAB L E 43 PARAMETERS OF VL AN MARK PAGE OF SE BOARD
Process
Mode of
VLAN
Auxiliary
Parameters
Description Remarks
Access
Mode
PVID, QoS PRI
The received data
frames carry no
VLAN ID. They are
added with a VLAN
layer according to
the PVID of this
port, and then are
exchanged.
The data frames
with VLAN ID will
be filtered out, and
the transmit side
will strip the
outmost VLAN ID.
Flow control and QoS
PRI of a port cannot
be set at the same
time.
This mode is
available when the
port is connected
with the device
which dose not
support receiving or
transmitting VLAN
label, i.e. PC.
TLS Mode PVID, QoS PRI
No matter if the
received data
frames carry VLAN
ID, they will be
added with one
VLAN layer
according to the
PVID at the port,
and then be
exchanged.
The transmit side
will strip the
outmost VLAN ID.
Flow control and QoS
PRI of a port cannot
be set at the same
time.
This mode is
available when VLAN
stack (QinQ) is used.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
76 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Process
Mode of
VLAN
Auxiliary
Parameters
Description Remarks
Transpare
nt Mode
Transparently
transmit Port
ID, link
Transport
State
The received data
frames are transparently
transmitted to the
destination port. Neither
of the receive end nor
the transmit end
processes the VLAN.
Traffic is transmitted
between the two
ports which have
identical transparent
transmission port
IDs.
Under this mode, the
ports should be
configured in pairs.
The two ports are
specified as one pair
by IDs. Hence, ID of
each transparent
port can not conflict
with the other ID in
one pair. For ZXMP
S200, the SE board
has the IDs from 1-
4; for other devices,
the SE boards have
the IDs from 1-8.
If Support for Link
Transport State is
enabled, the port can
transport the link
state.
Trunk
Mode
-
The received data
frames must have VLAN
ID, and those with no
VLAN ID will be filtered
out. The transmit side
does not strip VLAN.
This mode is available
when the port is
connected with the
device which is at the
convergence point or folk
point, also available when
the VCG (EOS) ports are
connected with each
other.
The VLAN Mark settings are valid only for the enabled ports. The higher the
Qos priority value is, the higher the service priority is. SE board only
supports two kinds of QoS priorities: 1 and 8.
iii. Configure other optional items
In the Ethernet adapter manager dialog box, the QoS Config,
Trunk Configuration, Loop Check, Speed Limit, LacpProtocol
Attribute, L2 ControlFrame Config and Port Mstp Protocol
Attribute pages are all optional. Configure them according to
service requirements.
Table 44 describes the optional pages.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 77
TAB L E 44 OPTI ONAL PAGES I N ETHERNET ADAPTER MANAGER DI AL OG BOX OF
SE BOARD
Page Description Remarks
QoS Config Set the QoS state of each port to
Absolutely Priority or None.
Absolutely Priority: QoS
function is enabled at the
port. When the shared
bandwidth of services is
insufficient, the system shall
guarantee the QoS by
sending service with higher
priority and meanwhile
trying the best to send
service with lower priority.
None: QoS function is
disabled at the port.
If the flow control has been
enabled at a port, the QoS
setting of this port is
invalid.
For a port employing the
access mode or TLS mode,
the bigger the QoS PRI
is, the higher priority does
the corresponding service
have.
Generally, if the QoS is set
to Absolutely Priority, it
shall cooperate with the
speed limit type of
Port+802.1Q and the
limit orient of Entrance
which shall be configured
in the Speed Limit page.
Trunk
Configuratio
n
The trunk function refers to
binding multiple Ethernet
physical ports to one logical
port so as to increase the
bandwidth capacity of the
link, evenly distribute data
into multiple physical links,
and protect links using
redundant routes.
All the ports in a Trunk
group should have identical
port type. The number of
ports can be 2, 4, or 8. And
the selected ports must be
adjacent.
The board will report
configuration failure in the EMS
if the configuration is incorrect.
Loop Check
Choose if to enable the loopback
check function of the VCG (EOS)
port. If the loopback check
function is enabled:
Upon detection of loopback
in SDH path, the related
VCG (EOS) port will be
automatically disabled so as
to prevent data service
broadcast storm caused by
VCG loopback.
When the loopback is
cancelled, the related VCG
(EOS) port will automatically
return to the status
configured in the EMS
It is recommended to
enable the loopback check
function which is enabled
by default.
For ZXMP S200, SE board
dose not support the loop
check function.
Speed Limit
Limit the speed of Entrance or
Out direction at each port:
Speed limit of the Entrance
direction: supports speed
Shall be configured only when
user has special requirement for
speed limit of Entrance
direction. Generally, it is not

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
78 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Page Description Remarks
limit types of By Port,
Port+VLAN, or
Port+802.1Q; where the
latter two types are valid
only in the Trunk mode. All
of the three types need to
be configured with the
speed limit and the burst
length.
Speed limit of the Out
direction: only supports the
speed limit type of By Port,
and can be set arbitrarily.
recommended to be configured.
For the VCG (EOS) port not
configured with speed limit, the
default speed limit is consistent
with the ports capacity
configuration and can
automatically adapt to the LCAS
state.
LACP
Protocol
Attribute
Set LACP protocol attributes
including NegotiateMode,
TimeoutMode and
PortLacpPriority
LACP protocol should be
used with Trunk function.
Normally, when the LACP
function is enabled, the
dynamic Trunk group
should be configured; or
else, the static Trunk group
should be configured.
If no necessary, the items
in LacpProtocolAttribute
page should keep the
default settings.
L2
ControlFram
e Config
Set the rule of processing L2
control frame, including
ProcessRange, L2 ControlFrame
Type and ProcessStyle:
ProcessRange: the process
range bases on port or
board. Select the
corresponding ports from
the left list box when the
process range is based on
port. The configuration takes
effect only on the selected
ports but not on the other
non-selected ports. On the
other side, when the process
range is based on board, the
configuration takes effect on
all of the ports of the board.
L2 ControlFrame Type: Set
the type of frame protocol.
ProcessStyle: Set the
process style for the frame,
including Same User Service,
Block and Pass. Same User
Service indicates processing
the L2 control frame as
processing general user
service, that is, the L2
control frame is transferred
and processed according to
the port mode; Block
indicates throwing away the
-

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 79
Page Description Remarks
L2 control frame; Pass
indicates transferring the L2
control frame without any
modification.
Port Mstp
Protocol
Attribute
Set the attribute of MSTP
protocol, including
StpPortEnable,
StpPortConnectType,
StpEdgePort, IdentifySTPFrame
and MstZoneSelect.
StpPortEnable: It is the
mandatory item. This item
indicates if to enable or
disable MSTP protocol. The
default setting is disabled.
Enabled when the port runs
MSTP protocol.
StpPortConnectType: It is
not a mandatory item. This
item indicates that the
network connected with the
port is point-to-point or
share. The default setting is
point to pint network.
However, if the port is
connected to HUB or is
working in the half-duplex
mode, the share network is
recommended.
StpEdgePort: It is not a
mandatory item. This item
indicates it is a common port
or edge port in the network.
The default setting is
common port. Herein, edge
port is the port connected
with the other network
topology.
IdentifySTPFrame: It is not a
mandatory item. This item
indicates the frame format is
identified by the port. The
default setting is IEEE
standard format which is
recommended when board
and board or board and
ZTEs switch are
communicated with each
other. On the other side,
when the board is
communicated with the
other companys device,
Cisco custom format is
recommended. For the
different ports with physical
connections, the
IdentifySTPFrame must be
consistent with each other;
The items which are not
mandatory should be
configured based on the
actual network topology.
For a trunk group, the
members should have
the same configurations.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
80 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Page Description Remarks
otherwise, the
communication is
obstructed, which will take
influence on the topology
calculation.
MstZoneSelect: It is not a
mandatory item. This item
indicates whether the port
and the other port are in a
same zone. The default
setting is auto which is
recommended when board
and board or board and
ZTEs switch are
communicated with each
other. The port is configured
as constraint (make the port
of local in the same zone
with the port of the
terminal) based on the
following two conditions:
The port is docked with the
other companys device;
The both docking ports have
the same domain name,
version, instance which are
same with the mapping
relations of VLAN.
Note: Ethernet adapter manager dialog box can be entered in another
way, i.e: In the Card Management dialog box of the NE, right-click the SE board
to pop up the shortcut menu of SE board. Then click the Ethernet adapter
manager menu item.
5. Configure capacity of VCG (EOS) port
Select the NE equipped with SE board in the client operation window,.
Then click the menu item Device Config -> Ethernet Management -
> VCG Port TS Config. The VCG port capacity config dialog box will
pop up. Configure capacity for the VCG (EOS) ports in the dialog box
according to the flowchart shown in Figure 49. The parameters are
described in Table 45.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 81
FI GURE 49 CONFI GURATI ON FL OWCHART OF VCG ( EOS) PORTS ON SE BOARD
Begin
Choose a VCG (EOS)
port
Choose the Time Slot Type
Choose the AU4
virtual concatenation
path
Choose the TUG3
virtual concatenation
path
Choose the TU12
virtual concatenation
path
Choose the Package
Type
Choose the LCAS Config mode
Set the Delay Time
(optional)
Choose the
Direction
Configure another port?
Click the Add button to add one path group
End
VC4
VC3
VC12
Bi-Dir Uni-Dir
UnLCAS
No
Yes

TAB L E 45 VCG ( EOS) PORT CAPACI TY PARAMETERS OF SE BOARD
Parameter Description Remarks
Time Slot
Type
Choose the timeslot type for VCG
group. The SE board supports
three kinds of virtual
concatenations respectively based
on VC4, VC3, and VC12.
Each port only supports one
kind of virtual concatenation
path group.
Each VCG group can only be
configured with one VC4, or
one to three VC3s, or one to
sixty-three VC12s.
Package
Type
Choose the package protocol for
Ethernet data frames.
Choose GFP if there is no special
requirement.
LCAS Config
Choose the LCAS
configuration mode for port,
including directional,
unidirectional, and un-LCAS.
If the unidirectional is
selected, it is necessary to
The bidirectional LCAS is
recommended.
The VC4 virtual concatenation
path group does not support
LCAS since there is only one

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
82 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter Description Remarks
enable LCAS for members
that are responsible for the
receive direction and the
send direction respectively.
VC4 in each group.
Delay Time
If the LCAS function is enabled,
the delay time of LCAS protection
can be configured to prevent
LCAS protection from happening
with SDH protection
simultaneously. In this way, the
LCAS protocol will not perform
protection immediately upon
alarm detection; instead, if alarm
still exists after the delay time, it
shall perform protection.
The SE board of current version
does not support this function.

Note: The VCG port capacity config dialog box can be entered in another
way, i.e, in the Card Management dialog box of the NE, right-click the SE board
to pop up the shortcut menu of SE board. Then click the VCG port capacity
config menu item.

6. Configure VLAN and STP
Follow the flowchart shown in Figure 50 to configure VLAN and STP.
The parameters are listed in Table 46.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 83
FI GURE 50 VL AN/ STP CONFI GURATI ON FL OWCHART OF SE BOARD
Begin
Create a customer
End
Is there any customer?
Yes
No
Select the NE, click the menu item SNMS ->
Customer Management
Customer
Management dialog box
Select the NE to be configured with VLAN, select the menu item
Device Config -> Ethernet Management -> Configure
Virtual LAN with The Data Card
Click the customer
Click the Add VLAN button
Set the VLAN Name and
VLAN IDs for the VLAN
added
Click the VLAN added
Add user ports and system
ports to the VLAN
Issue and apply the
settings
Enable the STP protocol?
Click the VLAN
Click the BridgeSet
button
Select the card and
enable the STP
No
Yes
Configure Virtual LAN
with The Data Card
diaglog box
BridgeSet dialog box



ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
84 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
TAB L E 46 VL AN/ STP CONFI GURATI ON DESCRI PTI ON OF SE BOARD
Operation Description Configuration Principles
VLAN
configuration
Create a VLAN
and add user
ports and system
port to it. This
operation is
mandatory.
The SE board can create VLAN with
discrete IDs in batch.
The VLAN ID of a port must be
identical with the PVID configured for
the port in the VLAN Mark page of
the Ethernet adapter manager
dialog box.
VLAN ID can range from 1 to 4095,
and the 4078 to 4095 are reserved
which are not recommended for use.
STP
configuration
When the
Ethernet traffic
becomes a ring or
mesh network, it
is recommended
to configure the
STP to avoid
traffic loop.
(Number of VLANs with STP enabled) 30
7. Configure the services
i. In the client operation window, select the NE responsible for
adding/dropping Ethernet traffic.
ii. Select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management ->
Service Config to enter the Service Config dialog box.
iii. Establish connection between the VCG path of VCG (EOS) port on
SE board and the corresponding path of optical line board using the
timeslot cross-connect configuration method.
8. Configure the optical line board of the passed-by site
i. Select the passed-by site icon in the client operation window, and
then select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -
> Service Config to enter the Service Config dialog box.
ii. Establish pass-through connection with the passed-by optical line
board.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 85
Configuration of RPR Ethernet
Service
The RPR series boards adopt the embedded Resilient Packet Ring (RPR)
technology to transmit the Ethernet service. The list of boards is shown in
Table 47.
TAB L E 47 RPR SERI ES BOARDS
Board
Name
Board
I D in
EMS
System Port
Quantity
RPR Port
Quantity
User Port
Quantity
Applicable
Equipment
RSEA RSEA RPR SPAN: 2
1 GE (optical
interface): 1
FE (electrical
interface): 8
ZXMP S380
ZXMP S390
RSEB-
RPR
RSEB
RSEB-
EOS
VCG (RPR SPAN): 2
VCG (EOS): 4(FE)
VCG(EOS):
4(FE)+2(GE)
1 GE (optical
interface): 2
FE (electrical or
optical
interface): 8
ZXMP S380
ZXMP S390
ZXMP S385
RSEB-
RPR
VCG (RPR SPAN): 2
VCG (EOS): 4(FE)
RSEB
RSEB-
EOS
VCG (EOS):
4(FE)+2(GE)
1 GE (optical
interface): 2
FE (electrical or
optical
interface): 4
ZXMP S330
ZXMP S325

Table 48 briefly introduces the ports mentioned in Table 47.
TAB L E 48 RPR PORTS
Port Function Concatenation Mode
RPR port
The Ethernet traffic is accessed to the
RPR ring through it.
-
RPR SPAN port
The ports connect to two RPR SPAN
rings for adding/dropping traffic. The
adaptation between RPR data frame
and SDH data frame is implemented
through them.
VC4 real concatenation
VCG (RPR SPAN) port
The ports connect to two RPR SPAN
rings for adding/dropping traffic. The
adaptation between RPR data frame
and SDH data frame is implemented
through them.
VC3 or VC4 virtual
concatenation
VCG (EOS) port
Implements the cross-ring process of
RPR ring traffic, or convergence of
VC12 virtual
concatenation

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
86 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Port Function Concatenation Mode
Ethernet services.
Serving for cross-ring process of
RPR ring traffic, it equals to a user
port.
Serving for convergence of
Ethernet services, its equals to the
VCG system port of SFE/SGE/SE
board.
The RPR ring includes two RPR SPAN rings in opposite directions.
[RSEA Card Description]
The RSEA board has two kinds of ports: RPR and RPR SPAN.
[RSEB Card Description]
The RSEB board has three kinds of ports: RPR, VCG (RPR SPAN) and VCG
(EOS).
In the EMS, the RSEB board is classified into RSEB-RPR board and RSEB-
EOS board according to the VCG port type provided by the board.
The RSEB-RPR board employs the RPR technology to transport traffic,
and can provide both kinds of system ports: VCG (RPR SPAN) ports
and VCG (EOS) ports.
The RSEB-EOS board employs the EOS technology to transport traffic.
It equals to the SFE/SGE/SE board and only provides one kind of
system ports: VCG (EOS) ports.
As for hardware, the Ethernet port of RSEB board supports 1000M
Ethernet optical interface, 100 M Ethernet optical interface or 10/100 M
Ethernet electrical interface. In the EMS, these two kinds of Ethernet
interfaces are identified by software/hardware version:
Version 0310: electrical interface
Version 1310: optical interface.
Configuring RSEA Board
1. Install boards other than RSEA board for the NE
In the client operation window, double-click the NE icon to open the
Card Management dialog box. Install all the functional boards, as
well as optical line board for adding/dropping Ethernet service.
2. Install ESEA boards for the NE
i. In the Card Management dialog box. Click the button
representing for RSEA board, the corresponding slot color in the
simulative subrack turns into yellow.
ii. Click the slot in yellow, which means add the board at this slot.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 87
3. Configure the boards
In the Card Management dialog box, right-click the RSEA board and
select the Property menu item from the shortcut menu to enter the
Card Property dialog box. And then click the Advanced button to
enter the Advanced dialog box.
i. Configure the user ports
On the Data Port Attribute page in the Advanced dialog box, set
the property of the user ports according to the flowchart shown in
Figure 51. The parameters are listed in Table 49.
FI GURE 51 USER PORT CONFI GURATI ON FL OWCHART OF RSEA BOARD
Enable a user port
Input Pvid
Access
Mode
Trunk
Mode
Set the Self Study MAC
Trunking Group and
Cross Connect Type
No
Data Port Attribute page
Configure another user port?
End
Begin
Yes
No
Choose the VLAN
Mode
Enable the flow
control
Choose the Duplex
Mode and Speed
Enable the flow control?
Yes
Enable QoS?
No
Yes


ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
88 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
TAB L E 49 USER PORT CONFI GURATI ON PARAMETERS OF RSEA BOARD
Parameters Descriptions Remarks
Port Use State
1-8 ports are 10/100 M
Ethernet electrical interfaces,
and port 9 is a 1000 M
Ethernet optical interface.
The port configuration will
not take effect until the port
is enabled.
VLAN Mode
Includes the access mode and
the trunk mode:
Access Mode: The received
data frames carry no VLAN ID.
They are added with a VLAN
layer according to the PVID of
this port, and then are
exchanged.
Trunk Mode: The received
data frames must have VLAN
ID, and those with no VLAN ID
will be filtered out. The
transmit side does not strip
VLAN.
If the port adopts the access
mode, it is necessary to set
the port PVID. Only port 9
only supports the trunk
mode.
Speed Select work speed for the port.
Duplex Mode Select work mode for the port.
The speed of the abutting
equipment should comply
with the duplex mode.
Pvid
In access mode, the port will
add VLAN ID to the received
data frame.
Value range: 1 to 4095
QoS Property
It is identification for Ethernet
layer 2 switch
Value range: 1-8, the bigger
the value is, the higher the
property of the service is.
Flow Control
Choose if to use the flow
control function. It is disabled
by default.
Once the flow control of a
user port is enabled, the flow
control should also be
enabled for the port of user
equipment which connects to
this user port.
Self Study
MAC
Set if the user port supports
self-study of MAC address. If
this function is disabled, the
port has to obtain the
destination address via the
static MAC address
configuration.
It is recommended to enable
this function.
Trunking
Group
Bind all the ports with the
same physical type to one
logical port so as to increase
bandwidth capacity of link,
evenly distribute data into
multiple physical links, and
protect links using redundant
routes.
It is optional and can be
configured according to
service requirement.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 89
Parameters Descriptions Remarks
Cross connect
type
Select the cable type of FE
electrical port, including three
configurations: MDIX Auto,
MDIX Constraint, MID
Constraint.
Two ports are connected
with cable, then,
If configured as MDIX
Auto, the ports can self-
negotiate with both
crossover cable and
straight through cable; if
configured as MDIX
Constraint or MDI
Constraint, the ports
must be connected with
crossover cable; If
configured as MDIX and
MDI respectively, the
ports must be connected
with straight through
cable.
If the type of cross
connect and the type of
cable are mismatched,
the port will be in
linkdown state.
If the speed and the
working duplex mode
are selected as one of
the constraint modes,
cross connect type
should be configured as
constraint MDIX or
constraint MDI; if the
speed and the working
duplex mode are
selected as auto mode,
the type of cross
connect should be
configured as MDIX
Auto. Otherwise, the
service will be affected.
Use default values for parameters not listed in the table.
ii. Configure the RPR port
On the RPR Port Attribute page in the Advanced dialog box,
enable the RPR port and set the Protect Type, Revertive Mode,
Protect Wait Time, and Wait and Recover Time according to
the network services.

Note: If there is SDH protection in the RPR network, it is recommend to set
the Protect Wait Time to 100 ms. If there is only RPR protection, the 0 ms is
recommended.


ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
90 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
iii. Configure the system ports
In the Advanced dialog box, follow the flowchart shown in Figure
52 to configure the VCG (RPR SPAN) ports.
FI GURE 52 SYSTEM PORT CONFI GURATI ON FL OWCHART OF RSEA BOARD
Delete the original path
group
Begin
Create two 155 Mbit/s path groups
Path Group Config page
Set Port Capacity page
Assign the two path groups to two
RPR SPAN ports respectively
End
Set Port Capacity page

If the RPR ring network rate is 622 Mbit/s, the capacity of each RPR
SPAN port is VC4-4C (622 Mbit/s). RPR SPAN port 1 occupies
1#AUG to 4#AUG, and RPR SPAN port 2 occupies 5#AUG to
8#AUG. AU4-4C concatenation must be set for the AU4 path of the
abutting optical line board.
If RPR ring network rate is 155 Mbit/s, the capacity of each RPR
SPAN port is VC4 (155 Mbit/s). RPR port 1 occupies 1#AUG, and
RPR port 2 occupies 5#AUG. There is no need to set concatenation
for the AU4 path of the optical line board.
iv. Set the data board property
On the Data Card Property page in the Advanced dialog box,
select the Running Mode and input the MAC Address for the
system. The parameters are described in Table 50.
TAB L E 50 RSEA BOARD PROPERTY PARA METERS
Running Mode
Options Descriptions Remarks
Default
Mode
The port forwards data packets by
searching the MAC address table,
thus implements the arbitrary
switching between user ports and
system ports.
It requires that the data frame
received at the user port has
already carried a VLAN ID.
VLAN
Mode
Data frames are forwarded by the
assigned VLAN and by searching
It requires that the user port
must adopt the access mode.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 91
Running Mode
Options Descriptions Remarks
the MAC address table. Traffic
between different VLANs is blocked
for the sake of isolation and
security.
Only the VLAN data bearing the
same PVID as the user port can
be forwarded, otherwise they will
be filtered out.
MAC Address
Description Remarks
Input the MAC address of the board in HEX
format.
MAC address must be unique. By
default, each RSEA board
installed has a unique MAC
address.
When setting it manually, the
second bit of MAC address
cannot be 1, since the system
considers the MAC address with
the second bit of 1 as the
multicast address.
4. Configure the user isolation
Follow the flowchart shown in Figure 53 to configure the user isolation.

Note: The VLAN IDs of different users can be identical, but the VLAN IDs of
the same user cannot be identical.











ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
92 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 53 USER I SOL ATI ON CONFI GURATI ON FL OWCHART OF RSEA BOARD
Begin
Create a customer
End
Is there any customer?
Yes
No
Select the NE, click the SNMS -> Customer
Management menu item
Customer Management
dialog box
Select a node in RPR ring network, click the Device Config ->
Ethernet Management -> Client Domain menu item
Click the customer
Apply and issue the
settings
STP
Client Domain
dialog box

Assign user ports to the customer


Select the same node in RPR ring network, click the Device
Config -> Ethernet Management -> RPR VLAN Domain
menu item
Click the same
customer
RPR VLAN Domain
dialog box
Click the Add VLAN button
Set VLAN ID for the VLAN
added
Click the VLAN added
Apply and issue the
settings
Assign user ports to
the VLAN

5. Configure services
i. Select a node and the menu item Device Config -> Ethernet
Management -> RPR Ethernet Service Attribute, to set the

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 93
attribute of RPR service for the VLAN classified in step 3 in the pop-
up dialog box.
The RPR traffic is classified into three types depending on the QoS:
type A, B, and C, with priorities of A>B>C.
Type A
Auxiliary parameters: Max BW and Reserved BW, where BW
refers to bandwidth.
The traffic of type A shares the reserved bandwidth in RPR ring.
Even in case of idleness, this bandwidth cannot be occupied by
traffic of other types. If type A traffic exceeds the upper limit of the
bandwidth, all of them will be discarded. It is not controlled by the
fairness algorithm, and has invariable rates. The delay and jitter
effect on them is the minimum.
It is applicable to analog Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) traffic.
Type B
Auxiliary parameters: Max BW and Min BW, where BW refers to
bandwidth.
Type B traffic is classified into B-type CIR traffic and B-type EIR
traffic.
The B-type CIR traffic occupies guaranteed bandwidth and are not
controlled by the fairness algorithm. When the bandwidth is idle, it
can be occupied by other traffic.
The B-type EIR traffic occupies bandwidth between the limited
bandwidth and the guaranteed bandwidth, which can be shared
with other nodes, and it is controlled by the fairness algorithm.
It is applicable to traffic which is insensitive to delay but requires
bandwidth guarantee. For example, some data traffic with high
requirement can occupy more bandwidth when there is some
available idle bandwidth.
Type C
Auxiliary paramesters: Max BW, where BW refers to bandwidth.
The traffic of type C is processed in an attempt, which has no
bandwidth guarantee and is controlled by the fairness algorithm.
When the traffic exceeds the bandwidth limit, it will be discarded
completely. It has the maximum delay and jitter.
It is applicable to data services with lower requirements.

Note: One VLAN can only have one traffic type, and different VLANs can
have identical traffic type.

ii. Select a node in the RPR ring and the menu item Device Config ->
SDH Management -> Service Config.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
94 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
In the Service Config dialog box, establish the connection
between the SPAN port of the RSEA board and the optical line
board according to the timeslot cross-connect configuration method.
The two SPAN ports should be connected to two optical line boards
respectively.

Note:
The VC4 paths occupied by two RPR SPAN ports should respectively connect
with two optical line boards.
If the rate of RPR ring network is 622 Mbit/s, i.e. the rate of path group at RPR
SPAN port is 622 Mbit/s, the AU4 path of the abutting optical line board should be
configured with AU4-4C real concatenation.

6. Configure the optical line boards for the passed-by node
In the client operation window, select a passed-by site and click the
menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config.
In the Service Config dialog box, establish the pass-through
connection for the passed-by optical line board.
Note: If the rate of path group at RPR SPAN port is 622 Mbit/s, the AU4
paths of the passed-by optical line boards should be configured with AU4-4C real
concatenation.

Configuring RSEB-RPR Board
When the RPR technology is adopted to transmit the Ethernet service, the
user ports and VCG (EOS) ports are all located at the user side.
Generally, the user port accesses Ethernet traffic directly, and the VCG
(EOS) port serves for connection with the system port of smart Ethernet
series boards (SFE/SGE). After L2 layer switching, the traffic pass through
the RPR system port to enter the RPR ring network.
The RSEB-RPR board provides RPR port, VCG (RPR SPAN) port, user port,
and VCG (EOS) port. The configuration procedure is described below:
1. Install boards for an NE
Double-click an NE icon in the client operation window to enter the
Card Management dialog box. Install the RSEB-RPR board, necessary
functional boards, and optical line boards for adding/dropping Ethernet
traffic.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 95
Caution: When installing RSEB-RPR board, the software/hardware version
cannot be modified in the Card property dialog box unless the Presetting has
been selected. Therefore, make sure to check the Presetting check box. The
RSEB-RPR electrical interface board of version 0310 is installed by default.

2. Configure the RPR port
i. In the Card Management dialog box, double-click the RSEB-RPR
board to pop up the Card Property dialog box. Then click the
Advanced button to enter the Advanced dialog box.
ii. On the RPR Port Attribute page in the dialog box, enable the RPR
port.
iii. Set the other properties of the RPR port as per requiremetns.
Generally, the default setting of RPR port is adopted.
3. Configure the board property on the Data Card Property page of the
Advanced dialog box. Refer to Table 41 for parameter descriptions.
4. Configure the VCG (EOS) ports and the user ports
i. In the Card Management dialog box, right-click the RSEB-RPR
board to pop up the shortcut menu. Click the Ethernet adaptor
manager menu item.
ii. On the PortProperty page of the Ethernet adaptor manager
dialog box, set the attributes for ports according to the flowchart
shown in Figure 46 and Figure 47.

Note:
The types and quantities of VCG (EOS) ports and of user ports are determined
by the board type.
In the EMS, the last two user ports of RSEB-RPR board are 1000 M optical
interfaces, and the others are 10/100 M electrical interfaces.

5. Configure the VLAN mark
On the VLAN Mark page of the Ethernet adaptor manager dialog
box, set the VLAN mark according to the flowchart shown in Figure 48.
6. Set capacities for the system ports
i. In the Card Management dialog box, right-click the RSEB-RPR
board to pop up the shortcut menu. Click the VCG port capacity
config menu item.
ii. Set the capacities for the VCG (RPR SPAN) ports and the VCG (EOS)
ports according to the flowchart shown in Figure 49.
Note:

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
96 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The VCG at the VCG (EOS) port adopts the VC12 virtual concatenation, and the
maximum total bandwidth is determined by the equipment type. Generally, the
LCAS function is enabled.
The VCG at the VCG (RPR SPAN) port adopts the VC3 or VC4 virtual
concatenation, and the maximum total bandwidth is determined by the equipment
type. The bandwidths of two VCG (RPR SPAN) ports must be identical. Generally,
the LCAS function is disabled.
VCG (RPR SPAN) ports and VCG (EOS) ports share the bandwidth at the
system side.
Generally, the default package type of GFP and the default delay time of 0 ms are
adopted.

7. Configure the VLAN and STP
Follow the configuration flowchart shown in Figure 50 to configure the
VLAN and STP.
Note:
The VLAN configuration is mandatory, which involves user ports, VCG (EOS)
ports, and RPR ports. Among which, the VLAN ID of a user port or VCG (EOS) port
must be consistent with the ports Pvid set in the Ethernet adaptor manager dialog
box.
The STP configuration is optional.

8. Configure the RPR service
i. In the client operation window, select an NE in the RPR ring
network. Click the menu item Device Config -> Ethernet
Management -> RPR Ethernet Service Attribute.
ii. Set the service type
Refer to corresponding description in the section of Configuring
RSEA Board.
iii. Set the Port-Ring Select Mode, which supports automatic
selection, manual selection, and forced selection.
Automatic selection
The RPR traffic automatically selects the shortest path of the port
ring for transmission. The shortest path is determined by the
hopping number of the site looping from ring 0 (SPAN 1) and ring 1
(SPAN 2) to each site in the ring network.
Manual or forced selection
Forces the RPR traffic to run on ring 0 (SPAN 1) or ring 1 (SPAN 2).
Generally, the manual selection mode is applied to the traffic of
type C which has no requirement for the guarantee bandwidth, so
as to obtain the maximum network bandwidth.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 97
Note: When steering protection occurs in the RPR ring network, manual
selection is disabled automatically to avoid traffic interruption.

iv. Set the MAC address of a static destination site
By default, the RSEB board automatically learns RPR address and
MAC address.
Note: With the static MAC address adopted, RPR traffic can only be
transmitted among the designated MAC addresses in the RPR ring network without
RPR exchange. It is usually applicable to the point-to-point traffic.


9. Configure services
i. Select the NE and click the menu item Device Config -> SDH
Management -> Service Config.
ii. In the Service Config dialog box, use the timeslot cross-connect
configuration method to establish connections between the RSEB-
RPR board and the optical line board, or between the RSEB-RPR
board and the SFE/SGE/SE board.

Note:
VCG (RPR SPAN) port 1 of a RSEB board must be connected to VCG (RPR SPAN)
port 2 of another RSEB board, and vice versa.
The VCG (RPR SPAN) ports must be connected correctly. Otherwise, the traffic
shall be blocked and the alarm of fiber connection error will be raised.
The VCG (EOS) port of RSEB board is usually connected with the system port
of SFE/SGE/SE board.

10. Configure the optical line boards of the passed-by site
i. In the client operation window, select a passed-by site. Click the
menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service
Config.
ii. In the Service Config dialog box, establish pass-through
connection with the passed-by optical line board.


ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
98 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Tip: The Ethernet adapter manager and the VCG port capacity config
dialog box can also be entered by clicking the corresponding menu items extended
in the Device Config -> Ethernet Management menu.

Configuring RSEB-EOS Board
The RSEB-EOS board transmits Ethernet services with EOS technology,
with the principle similar to that of the smart Ethernet boards
(SFE/SGE/SE board).
It provides VCG (EOS) port and user port. The configuration procedure is
described below.
1. Install boards for an NE
Double-click an NE icon in the client operation window to enter the
Card Management dialog box and install the RSEB-EOS board,
necessary functional boards, and optical line boards for
adding/dropping Ethernet traffic.
Caution: When installing RSEB-EOS board, the software/hardware version
cannot be modified in the Card property dialog box unless the Presetting has
been selected. Therefore, make sure to check the Presetting check box. The
RSEB-EOS electrical interface board of version 0310 is installed by default.
2. Configure the board property
i. In the Card Management dialog box, double-click the RSEB-EOS
board to pop up the Card Property dialog box. Then click the
Advanced button to enter the Advanced dialog box.
ii. Configure the board property on the Data Card Property page of
the Advanced dialog box according to actual need. Refer to Table
41 for parameter descriptions. Generally, the default settings are
adopted.
3. Configure the VCG (EOS) ports and the user ports
i. In the Card Management dialog box, right-click the RSEB-EOS
board and select Ethernet adaptor manager in the short menu to
pop up Ethernet adaptor manager dialog box.
ii. On the PortProperty page, set the attributes for ports according
to the flowchart shown in Figure 46 and Figure 47.
Note: The types and quantities of VCG (EOS) ports and of user ports are
determined by the board type.
4. Configure the VLAN mark

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 99
On the VLAN Mark page of the Ethernet adaptor manager dialog
box, set the VLAN mark according to the flowchart shown in Figure 48.
5. Set capacities for the VCG (EOS) ports
i. In the Card Management dialog box, right-click the RSEB-EOS
board to pop up the shortcut menu. Click the VCG port capacity
config menu item.
ii. Set the capacities for the VCG (EOS) ports according to the
flowchart shown in Figure 49.
Note:
The VCG at the VCG (EOS) port adopts the VC12 virtual concatenation, and the
maximum total bandwidth is determined by the equipment type. Generally, the
LCAS function is enabled.
Generally, the default package type of GFP and the default delay time of 0 ms
are adopted.

6. Configure the VLAN and STP
Follow the configuration flowchart shown in Figure 50 to configure the
VLAN and STP.
Note:
The VLAN configuration is mandatory.
The STP configuration is optional.
7. Configure services
i. In the client operation window, select the NE to be configured and
click the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management ->
Service Config.
ii. In the Service Config dialog box, establish the connection
between the TU12 path of the RSEB-EOS board and the TU12 path
of the optical line board according to the timeslot cross-connect
configuration method.
8. Configure optical line boards for the passed-by site
i. In the client operation window, select a passed-by site and select
the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service
Config.
ii. In the Service Config dialog box, establish pass-through
connection with the passed-by optical line board.


ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
100 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Tip: The Ethernet adapter manager and the VCG port capacity config
dialog box can also be entered by clicking the corresponding menu items extended
in the Device Config -> Ethernet Management menu.
Configuring MPLS Ethernet
Service
[Introduction]
MPLS Ethernet processing board is employed in access layer or
convergence layer of Metropolitan Area Network (MAN). The Ethernet
message is processed via the flow method. The board supports multi
switch method including MPLS, VLAN, etc., meanwhile, provides virtual
bridge function and guarantees the quality of point to point service. Hence,
it is one of the important boards to construct virtual private line (VPL) and
virtual private network (VPN). The SE boards are listed in Table 51.
TAB L E 51 MPL S ETHERNET SERVI CE BOARDS
Board Name
and
Combination
Board Name
and Version in
EMS
User Port
Quantity
VCG (EOS)
Port Quantity
Applicable
Equipment
MSEA + EIFEx8 MSE (0310)
GE (Optical) : 2
FE (Electrical) : 8
VCG : 64 ZXMP S385
MSEA + OIS1x8 MSE (1310)
GE (Optical) : 2
FE (Optical) : 8
VCG : 64 ZXMP S385
MSEB + EIFEx8 MSE (0320)
GE (Optical) : 2
FE (Electrical) : 8
VCG : 64 ZXMP S385
MSEB + OIS1x8 MSE (1320)
GE (Optical) : 2
FE (Electrical) : 8
VCG : 64 ZXMP S385
MSE board divides into MSEA and MSEB. MSEA supports Ethernet
Virtual Private LAN (EVPLAN) but MSEB does not support EVPLAN. In
EMS, select software/hardware version to differentiate MSE and FE
interface types whose configurations are similar.
User port can be configured as user Ethernet port or MPLS Ethernet
port via EMS. User Ethernet port of this board, which is same with
those of other boards, is used to access Ethernet service; MPLS
Ethernet port is used to access Ethernet service carrying with MPLS
label.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 101
VCG port can be configured as VCG (EOS) port or VCG (GFP MPLS)
port. VCG (EOS) port, which is same with those of other boards, is
used to connect with SDH side; VCG (GFP MPLS) port is used to
connect with the Ethernet service carrying with MPLS label. The service
path is VCG path, and the message format is GFP+MPLS label+ Normal
Ethernet Message.
MPLS Ethernet processing board accesses or converges the distributed
service to the trunk network or backbone network, then classifies the
service by flow, identifies the object address, controls the speed,
schedules and shapes the service. Following, transports the service by
Ethernet port or by the SONET/SDH ports after encapsulated via
GFP/HDLC/X.86 protocol.
MSEA board supports EVPLAN, Ethernet Private Line (EPL) and Ethernet
Virtual Private Line (EVPL). MSEB board supports EPL and EVPL.
Hereinafter, MSE represents MSEA and MSEB.
Configuring EPL Service
EPL is a point to point service which transparently transports Ethernet
service from point to point, does not perform layer 2 switching and self-
study MAC address. EPL service of each user is carried via private SDH
path, which indicates that only the user occupies the bandwidth of its SDH
path.
EPL service is configured on MSE board by configuring the two ports of
MSE board in pair; therefore, the service is transparently transported
between the two ports.
[Steps]
1. Installing the board
Double-click the NE icon in the client operation window to open the
Card Management dialog box. Then, install necessary functional
boards, optical line board and MSE board which can add/drop Ethernet
traffic.
Note:
The software/hardware version cannot be modified in the Card property
dialog box unless the Presetting has been selected. Therefore, make sure to
check the Presetting check box.
The version of software/hardware should be consistent; the corresponding
relations with the actual board are listed in Table 51.

2. Configure the property

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
102 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Right-click the MSE board in the Card Management dialog box, and
select Property in the shortcut menu to enter the Card Property dialog
box. The properties of MSE board are list in Table 52.
TAB L E 52 PROPERTI ES OF MSE BOARD
Option Description Remark
Working
mode
Port No. , Working
mode, Setting mode
and AUG List
The default setting is recommended and can not be
modified randomly.
TPID
TPID is the ID which identifies the outmost VLAN layer.
It has two options: 0x8100 and 0x88A8. TPID of the
local device should be consistent with the TPID of the
docking device.
TPID + VLAN ID can implement the VLAN extended
function, where the TPID and VLAN ID must be the
same as those of the docking port.
The item can be modified when presetting the
attributes or the board not-in-position. If there are no
special requirements, then the default setting is
recommended.
Set MAC Aging
Value range: 1-30000. If there are no special
requirements, then the default setting is recommended.
J umbo Configuration
If the setting is Support, the board supports the
frame length from 64 byte to 9216 byte; if the setting
is No Support, the board supports the frame length
up to 1518 byte.
If there are no special requirements, then the default
setting is recommended.
OSPF Protocol Enable
If the setting is Enable, the board supports auto LSP
and static LSP; if the setting is Disable, the board
only supports static LSP.
If there are no special requirements, then the default
setting is recommended.
OSPF domain ID
IDs of all nodes in one OSPF network domain must
same with each other. If there are no special
requirements, the default setting is recommended.
Domain
authentication type
If the setting is Simple authentication, the
password of the port should be set in the MPLS
Port Attr Page of Ethernet adapter manager
dialog box. Only the ports with same password can
communicate with each other. Otherwise, neither
the communication nor auto LSP can be
established.
If the setting is Not authentication, it is not
necessary to set the password.
If there are no special requiremetns, the default
setting is recommended.
RSVP refresh time
Set the RSVP refresh time, If no special necessary, the
default setting is recommended.
Data
Board
Property
Hello interval
Set hello interval between the two communicating
sides, If there are no special requiremetns, the default

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 103
Option Description Remark
setting is recommended.
Router ID
Set the IP address of the board. It is a mandatory item.
Router ID of each segment is 1-255. Router ID in one
network must be different.
MPLS
Port Set
Port type
Set MPLS port attributes according to the requirement
of service; the user port can be set as User Ethernet
port or MPLS Ethernet port; VCG port can be set as
VCG (EOS) port or VCG (GFP MPLS) port.
User Ethernet port: accessing Ethernet service,
which is same with the user ports of other
Ethernet board;
MPLS Ethernet port: accessing the Ethernet service
carrying MPLS label. The message format is
Ethernet MAC + MPLS label + Normal Ethernet
Message
VCG (EOS) port: connecting to SDH side, which is
same with the VCG (EOS) port of the other
Ethernet board.
VCG (GFP MPLS) port: accessing the Ethernet
service carrying MPLS label, the service is carried
by VCG path, and the message format is GFP +
MPLS label + Normal Ethernet Message.
MPLS port must be configured while installing the board. After the board
installation, the setting of MPLS port can only be viewed but cannot be modified.
3. Configure user port/MPLS port
In the client operation window, select the NE equipped with SE board.
Click the menu item Device Config -> Ethernet Management ->
Ethernet adapter manager. The configuration includes the following
items.
i. Configure the properties of the port
Enable and configure user ports and MPLS ports on the
PortProperty page of Ethernet adapter manager dialog box.
The configuration flowchart of user ports is shown in Figure 54. The
parameters and configuration principles are listed in Table 53.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
104 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 54 CONFI GURATI ON FL OWCHART OF USER PORTS
Enable the user port
Select the duplex mode
Select the speed
Select cross-connect type
If configure another user port?
End
Start
No
Yes

TAB L E 53 PARAMETERS AND CONFI GURATI ON PRI NCI PL ES
Parameter Description Remark
Port
User port is set as MPLS
Ethernet port or user
Ethernet port according to
the accessed service.
The physical interface type
of user port id decided by
the type of board. Herein, 1-
8 user ports are 10/100 M
FE electrical interfaces or
optical interfaces, 9-10 user
ports are 1000 M GE optical
interface.
Only if the port is Start, the
correlative settings are valid.
Choose The
Speed
Select the working speed for
port.
Choose The
Duplex
Select the working mode for
port.
The speed and duplex mode of a
port should be consistent with
those of the docking equipment.
Cross
Connect Type
Select the cable type of FE
electrical port, including three
configurations: MDIX Auto, MDIX
Constraint, MID Constraint.
Two ports are connected with
cable, then,
If configured as MDIX Auto,
the ports can self-negotiate
with both crossover cable
and straight through cable; if
configured as MDIX
Constraint or MDI
Constraint, the ports must
be connected with crossover
cable; if configured as MDIX
and MDI respectively, the

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 105
Parameter Description Remark
ports must be connected
with straight through cable.
If the type of cross connect
and the type of cable are
mismatched, the port will be
in linkdown state.
If the speed and the working
duplex mode are selected as
one of the constraint modes,
cross connect type should be
configured as constraint
MDIX or constraint MDI; if
the speed and the working
duplex mode are selected as
auto mode, the type of cross
connect should be
configured as MDIX Auto.
Otherwise, the service will
be affected.
In PortProperty page, Flow Control and Self Study MAC can not be set.

ii. Configure MPLS Port Attribute
In the MPLS Port Attr page of Ethernet adapter manager dialog
box, enable MPLS port and set the attributes.
The parameters and configuration principles are listed in Table 54.
TAB L E 54 PARAMETERS AND CONFI GURATI ON PRI NCI PL ES OF MPL S PORT ( MSE
BOARD)
Parameters Descriptions Remark
Port
The port with MPLS
attributes
The port with MPLS can be set as User
Ethernet port or VCG (GFP MPLS) port.
The board supports 48 VCG (GFP
MPLS) ports by default which should
be set during installing the board.
Refer to the installation of the board
for the setting.
Port IP
Port IP address of MPLS
port
IP address of MPLS port that the
service passes by must be
configured; moreover, the IP
address must be unique in the
whole net. For example, a LSP
passes VCG (GFP MPLS) port 1,
the IP address of the port must be
configured then.
On the other side, for the MPLS
port that no service passes by, it is
suggested that the IP address
should not be configured.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
106 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameters Descriptions Remark
Port Cost
Routing cost of the port
which is used when
calculating the routing.
For the port with service,
it is suggested that the
port cost should not be
modified.
For auto LSP, it is prior to be
established on the physical path which
has the rather lower port cost.
Port OSPF
Protocol
Enable or disable the port
OSPF protocol. The
default setting is
recommended.
Enable OSPF if the LSP is established
based on the protocol.
OSPF Port
Type
Set the OSPF port type,
only PeerToPeer type is
supported, the default
setting is recommended.
-
Port Traff
Project
Enable or disable the port
traffic project
After the port traffic project is
disabled, Expedited Forwarding (EF)
and Assured Forwarding (AF) can not
be established. It is suggest that the
PortTraffProject be enabled for the
path with service.
Interval
Between
Resend OSPF
Ctrl Frame
Set the interval between
resend OSPF control
frames, the default setting
is recommended.
-
Interval
Between
Hello Frame
Set the interval between
Hello frames, the default
setting is recommended.
This setting of the port should be same
with that of the connecting port;
otherwise, the protocol would be
interrupted.
Survive Time
of Port
Set the survive time of the
port. The default setting is
recommended.
The setting of the port should be same
with that of the connecting port.
Confirm Port
Password
Confirm the password
of the port for
authenticating the
routing protocol.
In the Data Card
Property page of
Advanced.. dialog
box of the board
property, if the
domain
authentication type is
Simple
authentication, this
item must be
configured then.
The setting of the port should be same
with that of the connecting port.
MAC Addr of
MPLS Seal
Dest
Set MAC address of MPLS
seal destination
If the port is connected to MPLS
Ethernet port of the other board, this
item must be set as the MAC address
of the other board. Otherwise, it is no
necessary to set this item.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 107
iii. Configure VLAN mark
In the VLAN Mark page of Ethernet adapter manager dialog
box, select the VLAN processing mode for user port and VCG port.
As MSE board supports the trunk mode, keep the default settings in
this page.
iv. Configure the other items
Loop Check page of Ethernet adapter manager dialog box is an
optional page. The configurations are according to the service
requirements.
The introductions of Loop Check page are listed in Table 55.
TAB L E 55 CONFI GURATI ONS OF LOOP CHE CK PAGE
Page Description Remark
Loop
Check
Detecting the loop of
VCG (EOS) port.
Only when the VCG
(EOS) port detects that
the first activation
timeslot is looped, the
VCG (EOS) port would
be closed.
If the VCG (EOS) port is closed, which MSE
board can not detect, meanwhile, EMS has
no correlative alarm information.
The loop detect is invalid when other
timeslots are looped except the first
activation timeslot.
Currently, MSE board does not support Trunk configuration, LACP protocol
and L2 control frame configuration.

Tip: Another way to get into Ethernet adapter manager dialog box is:
Right-click MSE board in the Board Management dialog box, select the Ethernet
adapter manager in the shortcut menu.

4. Configure VCG port capacity
In the client operation window, select an NE equipped with MSE board;
click the menu item Device Config-> Ethernet Management-> VCG
Port TS Config to configure VCG (GFP MPLS) port capacity and VCG
(EOS) port capacity. The flowchart of configuration is shown in Figure
55, the descriptions of parameter are listed in Table 56.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
108 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 55 FL OWCHART OF CONFI GURI NG VCG ( GFP MPL S) PORT CAPACI TY AND
VCG ( EOS) PORT CAPACI TY ( MSE BOARD) )

TAB L E 56 PARAMETER DESCRI PTI ONS OF VCG PORT CAPACI TY
Parameters Descriptions Remarks
Time Slot
Type
Select the timeslot
type of VCG. MSE
board supports three
levels of virtual
concatenations: VC-
4, VC-3 and VC-12.
One port supports only one level of virtual
concatenation at a time;
Each VCG can configure 8 VC-4s or 24 VC-
3s or 63 VC-12s at most.
The maximum capacity at system side is
16 VC-4s. Only the VC-12s in AU1-AU4 are
available. The number of VC-12 in all VCG
port must be less than 252.
Package
Type
Select GFP as the
encapsulation
protocol of Ethernet
frame
Currently, MSE board only supports GFP
protocol

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 109
Parameters Descriptions Remarks
LCAS Config
Select the type of
LCAS configuration,
including Bi-Dir, Uni-
Dir and Non-LCAS.
For Uni-Dir type, the
timeslots which are
enabled LCAS
function should be
set at both the
receiving direction
and sending
direction.
If the type of LCAS Config is not Non-LCAS,
MSE board supports if to activate the
added time slots. If the time slots are not
activated, which means the path on the
time slot can not be used.
MSE board does not support cancelling the
time slots. For example, five LCAS time
slots are configured in one VCG group. The
only way of cancelling two of them is to
deactivate those two time slots; If these
two timeslots are needed by the other VCG
group, the VCG group which these two
time slots originally belongs to, must be
cancelled, then a new VCG group must be
configured. Otherwise, the configuration
will be failed.
Delay Time
If LCAS is enabled, in
order to avoid the
LCAS protection and
SDH protection
works at the same
time, the LCAS delay
time must be set.
When an alarm
happens, LCAS
protocol does not
take effect until the
alarm is still existed
after a delay time.
The item is invalid if the LCAS Config is
Non-LCAS.
Currently, MSE board does not support this
function.

Note: anthoer way to get into VCG port capacity config dialog box is:
In the Board Management dialog box, right-click MSE board and select VCG port
capacity config in the shortcut menu.
5. Configure EPL
i. In the client operation window, select an NE equipped with MSE
board, click the menu item Device config-> Ethernet
Management-> EPL Config to go to EPL Config dialog box.
ii. Click New.. button to go to New EPL dialog box.
iii. Input EPL ID and name.
iv. Enable Link Status Transparent (LST) according to the requirement.
Note: If LST is enabled, when the system port of the board recieves
Customer Signal Failure (CSF) or Loss of Frame Delineation (LFD) , the connections
of user port in this EPL group will be link down constraintly. Till CSF or LFD is
disappeared, the connections are linked up again.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
110 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
v. For MSEB board, If Stream Control is enabled or disabled
according to the requirements. For MSEA board, If Stream
Control takes the default setting which is Disable. That means,
currently the MSEA board does not support Stream Control.
vi. In the board selecting list box at the left of the dialog box, double-
click the MSE board for configuration.
vii. In the port selecting list box at the right of the dialog box, double
click to select a user port and a system port which are configured in
pair.
viii. Click Add button to add the configured EPL service.
ix. Repeat the step i to step viii to add other EPL services.
x. Click Apply button to confirm the configured EPL service.
xi. Click Close button to close the New EPL dialog box and return to
Epl Config dialog box.
xii. Click Apply button to send the configurations.
xiii. Click Close button to close Epl Config dialog box.
6. Configure service
In the client operation window, select the NEs which are
adding/dropping service, and then click the menu item Device Config-
> SDH Management -> Service Config to pop up Service Config
dialog box. In the Service Config dialog box, establish the
connections between VCG paths of MSE board and the corresponding
paths of optical line board.
7. Configure the passed-by optical line board
In the client operation window, select the passed-by site; click the
menu item Device Config-> SDH Management -> Service Config
to pop up Service Config dialog box. In the Service config dialog
box, establish the pass-through connection of the passed-by optical
line board.
Configuring EVPL Service
EVPL is a point to point service. The difference from EPL is that, different
users can share the link bandwidth. MSE board adopts MPLS L2 VPN to
achieve the EVPL service which means to establish a simulative service
between different MSE boards in one VPN. Each MSE board which is also
called Virtual Forwarded Instance (VFI) is a node in the VPN. The VFI does
not support L2 switching and self-study MAC address, that is, the Ethernet
service enters into the Label Switched Path (LSP) directly.
[Steps]
1. Configure the properties of the board
Port properties and VCG port capacity are according to the step 1-step
4 described in Configuring EPL Service.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 111
2. Establish LSP
i. In the client operation window, select an NE equipped with MSE
board, and then click the menu item Device Config-> Ethernet
Management -> LSP Set to pop up LSP Set dialog box.
ii. Click New.. button to go to New LSP dialog box.
iii. Establish LSP based on Figure 56 and Table 57.
FI GURE 56 WORK FL OW OF ESTAB L I SHI NG THE L SP ( MSE BOARD)


ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
112 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
TAB L E 57 PARAMETER DESCRI PTI ONS OF ESTAB L I SHI NG L SP ( MSE BOARD)

Parameters Descriptions Remarks
LSP Name LSP name in EMS -
LSP ID LSP identifier in EMS
LSP ID in one node is
unique.
Config Mode
Configuration modes of LSP, including Static
Route Config, auto and Half Auto.
Static Route Config: In this mode, user
should specify all of the LSP parameters
including QoS attributes, peak speed, burst
length, source/destination node, output port
and label of source node, input port and
label of destination node, input/output port
and label of the middle node.
auto: In this mode, user just needs to
specify QoS attributes, peak speed, burst
length and source/destination node, except
any input/output label of node and the
middle node which will be set by the
protocol automatically,
Half Auto: In this mode, user needs to
specify QoS attributes, peak speed, burst
length, source/destination node and the
middle node, except any input/output label
which is set by the protocol automatically.
The differentiation of
auto mode and Half
Auto mode is that the
Half Auto mode must
configure all of the
passed-by nodes of LSP,
but auto mode just
configures the source
and destination node.

QoS Property
QoS property, including (Enhanced Forwarded)
EF, (Assured Forwarded) AF and (Best Effort) BE
EF: called as A class service, enhanced
forward the service to guarantee the
Committed Information Rate (CIR) of
service.
AF: called as B class service, guarantee the
maximum speed of the service is CIR, take
the best effort to forward service whose
speed is beyond CIR. However, the
maximum speed of service should not be
over Peak Information Rate (PIR).
BE: called as C class service, take the best
effort to forward the service.
The sequence of priority
of the service is EF, AF,
BE. The priority of EF is
the highest.
Peak Speed
The maximum bandwidth of LSP, the minimum
peak speed is 64kbit/s, the maximum peak
speed is 1250000 kbit/s.
-
Pledge
Speed
The minimum bandwidth of LSP. Only AF service
can pledge the speed and the peak speed.
When the network is
blocked, CIR of AF
service can be
guaranteed, but the
bandwidth of PIR
maybe occupied by the
services with higher or
equal priority.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 113
Note: In the Router Table list box, the input label and output label of the
border two lines must be same with each other. Cancelling the middle node will
make the labels inconsistent. At that time, click Compute Outlabel button to let
the labels be consistent again.
iv. Click Apply button to save LSP configuration
v. Repeat step iii and step iv to establish another LSP.
vi. Click Close button to close the New LSP dialog box and return to
LSP Set dialog box.
vii. Click Apply button in LSP Set dialog box to send LSP configuration.
viii. Click Close button in LSP Set dialog box to exit LSP Set dialog box.
3. If the VPN with Tag mode is needed, then configure the VLAN based on
the work flow described in Figure 50.
4. Establish VPN
i. In the client operation window, select the NE equipped with MSE
board; click the menu item Device Config -> Ethernet
Management -> VPN CONFIG to enter the VPN Config dialog
box.
ii. Click New...button to go to New VPN dialog box. The parameter
descriptions are listed in Table 58.
TAB L E 58 PA RAMETER DESCRI PTI ONS OF ESTAB L I SHI NG NEW L SP ( MSE BOARD)
Parameters Descriptions Remark
VPN Name The name of VPN
-
Service ID The ID of service
Service ID and Client ID compose
of VPN ID, VPN ID must be unique
in the whole network.
Client ID can be all 0, the last two
bytes of Client ID of any two VPNs
can not be identical.
Client ID The ID of client

Traffic type
The type of
Ethernet service,
including Evplan
and Evpl, here Evpl
is needed.
-
Work Mode
The work mode of
VPN, including Raw
and Tag
Raw, a transparent transmission
mode. In this mode, the board
port does not identify VLAN tag
and just transparently transmits
the VLAN tag;
Tag, a tag mode, in this mode, the
board processes VLAN tag
according to port+VLAN.
Auto Find
Topology auto find, If selecting Multi2Multi, user just

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
114 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameters Descriptions Remark
including
Multi2Multi,
one2Multi and
forbid.
Currently, the
board supports
Multi2Multi and
forbid. However,
for Tag mode, this
item should be
forbidden.
specifies the board and port involved in
the service; other configurations are
established automatically by the board.
MSEA board supports VPN Auto Find of
Raw mode of EVPL/EVPLAN; MSEB
board supports VPN Auto Find of Raw
mode of EVPL.
Central IP
The IP address of
central node, there
is no necessary to
configure this item.
The item takes effect in case of Evplan
and one2Multi.

iii. Click Apply button to confirm the VPN configurations, then Click
Close button to return to VPN Config dialog box.
iv. Click Apply button in VPN Config dialog box to forward the VPN
configurations.
5. Establish VFI/VSI (for instance, the VPN under Raw working mode)
Establishing VFI/VSI of VPN under Tag working mode refers to the step
5 described in Configuring EVPLAN Service.
i. Select a VPN in VPN Config dialog box and click VFI/VSI button
to go to VFI Config dialog box.
ii. Input VSI name, click New VFI/VSI and Select board in the
LogResource list box, Click button to add the board to VFI
list box.
iii. Repeat step ii to add another MSE board to VFI list box, as shown
in Figure 57.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 115
FI GURE 57 VFI CONFI G DI AL OG BOX ( EVPL SERVI CE) ( 1)

iv. In VFI list box, click a board and the corresponding ports are
displayed in LogResource list box. Select the wanted port and
click to add the port to VFI list box.
v. Repeat step iv to add the port of another MSE board to VFI list box,
as shown in Figure 58.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
116 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 58 VFI CONFI G DI AL OG BOX ( EVPL SERVI CE) ( 2)


Note: If configured with EPL, EVPL or EVPLAN service, the port will not show
in the LogResource list box. For the VPN under Raw mode, if configured with
VLAN, the port will not show in LogResource list box too.

vi. Click Apply button to forward VFI configurations. If the Auto Find
in Establish VPN is Multi2Multi, go to 7. Configure the service
directly.
Note: For the VPN supporting Multi2Multi, the following VFI/VSI Attribute
Config, New PW and Binding LSP can be automatically completed by the board
but cannot completed manually.

vii. Click Property button to go to the Local Bind Label page of
VFI/VSI Attribute Config dialog box.
viii. Modify the Config Mode as Static Config, and input the local bind
label with value from 16 to 4095. The parameters in other pages
keep the default settings.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 117
Note: Since the board does not support Auto Config mode, the loca bind
label should be set by manually, moreover, the local bind label must be unique in
one board.
ix. Click Apply button to forward the configurations.
x. Click Close button to close VCI/VSI Attribute Config dialog box,
and return to the VFI Config dialog box.
6. Establish New Pseudo Wire (PW) and Binding LSP
i. Click PW button in VFI Config dialog box to enter PW window.
ii. Click New.. button to enter New PW and Binding LSP dialog box.
iii. Select VFI port.
iv. Select the port type which is same with the type selected in
5.Establish VFI/VSI , and then the right list box displays the port
number. For example, select User Ethernet port in Figure 58, here
also select the User Ethernet Port.
v. Set PwID which is unique for each board. The default setting is
recommended.
vi. Select COS attribute. If VFI/VSI port is under the Raw mode, here
By Port should be selected; if VFI/VSI port is under the Tag mode,
then By Port or By VLan should be selected.
vii. Binding LSP
Click Binding LSP check box; and then select the bound out LSP
and in LSP from the out LSP list and in LSP list respectively.
viii. Select Enable and EMS Out Label check box, and then input the
label value in the Out Label input box, this value is same with the
local bind label in 5.Establish VFI/VSI.
Note: Not select the check box indicates that the binding of PW label and
the LSP are temperarily cancelled, and the service will be intterupted.
ix. Repeat step iii to step viii to configure LSP for another VFI port.
x. Click Apply button to save the configurations.
xi. Click Close button to return to the PW window.
xii. Click Apply button to forward the configurations.
7. Configure the service
In the client operation window, select the NE which is adding/dropping
the Ethernet service, and click the menu item Device Config-> SDH
Management -> Service Config. In the Service Config dialog box,
establish the connection between VCG groups of MSE board and the
corresponding paths of optical line board.
8. Configure the passed-by optical line board

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
118 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
In the client operation window, select the passed-by NE, click the
menu item Device Config-> SDH Management -> Service Config.
In the Service Config dialog box, establish the pass-through
connection of passed-by optical line board.
Configuring EVPLAN Service
EVPLAN is the multi-to-multi Ethernet service. That is, full connection of
point-to-point virtual circuit is established among multi points, multi
virtual circuits multiple to a label switch LSP, then map into VCG to
transfer the Ethernet service and achieve the bandwidth shareing.
MSE board supports EVPLAN service.
[Steps]
1. According to the step 1-step 4 in Configuring EPL Service to configure
board property, port property and VCG capacity of MSE board.
2. Establish the LSP according to step 2 in Configuring EVPL Service.
3. If VPN under Tag mode is needed, configure VLAN according to the
flowchart in Figure 50. For VPN with Tag mode, if not configured with
VLAN, the port will not be displayed in LogResource list box.
4. Establish VPN according to the descriptions in Establish VPN, here, the
traffic type is Evplan.
5. Establish VFI/VSI (for instance, VPN under Tag mode.)
VFI/VSI of VPN under Raw mode refers to the step 5 in Configuring
EVPL Service.
i. In VPN Config window, select a VPN configuration and click
VFI/VSI button to go to VSI config window.
ii. Input VSI name and click New VFI/VSI button, then select board
in LogResource list box and click button to add the board to
VSI list box.
iii. Repeat step ii to add another MSE board to VSI list box, as shown
in Figure 59.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 119
FI GURE 59 VSI CONFI GURATI ON ( EVPL A SERVI CE) ( 1)

iv. In VSI list box, click the selected board, then the corresponding
ports will be displayed in LogResource list box, click button
to add the port to VSI list box, as shown in Figure 60.
FI GURE 60 VSI CONFI GURATI ON ( EVPL A SERVI CE) ( 2)


ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
120 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
v. Repeat step iv to add the port of another MSE board to VSI list box,
as shown in Figure 61.
FI GURE 61 VSI CONFI GURATI ON ( EVPL A SERVI CE) ( 3)

Note: The port will not be displayed in the LogResource list box, if,
the port has been employed by other EVPL, EPL or EVPLAN service;
the port has not been configured with VLAN.

vi. Click Apply button to forward VSI configurations.
vii. Click New Emul Port button to enter into New Emul Port dialog
box as shown in Figure 62.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 121
FI GURE 62 NEW EMUL PORT DI AL OG BOX

viii. In the VFI/VSI list box, select the source board; in the
BoardSelect tree, select the destination board and then click Add
button to create An Ethernet port for emulation.
For example, in Figure 62, board VSI13 (5,6,7,13) and board VSI23
(5,6,7,14) have the bi-directional service, then the configurations
of Ethernet port emulation is described as following:
Firstly, select VSI13 (5,6,7,13) in VFI/VSI list box, then select
MSE[1-1-14] (VSI23) in BoardSelect list box. Later, Click Add
button to configure the emulation Ethernet port from VSI13
(5,6,7,13) to MSE[1-1-14] (VSI23); likewise, configure the
emulation Ethernet port from MSE[1-1-14] (VSI23) to VSI13
(5,6,7,13).
ix. Click OK button to save the configuration and return to VSI Config
dialog box.
x. In VSI Config dialog box, select the new emulation Ethernet ports,
then LogResource list box displays the available VLAN, as shown
in Figure 63.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
122 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 63 VSI CONFI GURATI ON ( ADD VAL N FOR EMUL ATI ON ETHERNET PORT)
( 1)

xi. Select VLAN from LogResource list box and click button to add
VLAN for the new emulation Ethernet port, as shown in Figure 64.
FI GURE 64 VSI CONFI GURATI ON ( ADD VAL N FOR EMUL ATI ON ETHERNET PORT)
( 2)

xii. Click Apply button to make the configuration valid.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 123
xiii. Click Property button to enter into the Local Bind Label page of
VFI/VSI Attribute Config dialog box.
xiv. Modify the Config Mode as Static Config, and then input the local
bind label which is from 16 to 4095.
Note: Since the board dose not support the Auto Config mode, the local
bind label should be set manually, moreover, the local bind label is unique for a
board.
xv. Go to the broadcast limit page and select the broadcast limit type.
If the Limit selected, the broadcast speed is limited as 1000
kbit/s, the forward bandwidth of broadcast is 1 M. Other
parameters in VFI/VSI Attribute Config dialog box keep the
default settings.
xvi. Click Apply button to make the configurations valid.
xvii. Click Close button to close VFI/VSI Attribute Config dialog box
and return to VSI Config dialog box.
6. Create PW and LSP according to Configuring EVPL Service.
It is not necessary to set the port type here, the Emulated Port is by
defaulted. If VFI/VSI port is under the Tag mode, then By Port or By
VLan should be selected. VLAN ID is needed for the mode of By
VLan. Besides, different VLAN can bind different LSPs in order to
provide different service.
7. Configure the service
In the client operation window, select the NE which is adding/dropping
the Ethernet service, and click the menu item Device Config-> SDH
Management -> Service Config. In the Service Config dialog box,
establish the connection between VCG groups of MSE board and the
corresponding paths of optical line board.
8. Configure the passed-by optical line board
In the client operation window, select the passed-by NE, click the
menu item Device Config-> SDH Management -> Service Config.
In the Service Config dialog box, establish the pass-through
connection of passed-by optical line board.
VLAN Configuration Example
Suppose both NE K and NE L are ZXMP S320 equipment working at 622
Mbit/s, supporting the VLAN service in the network, as shown in Figure 65.
To illustrate the Ethernet service networking mode clearly, other NEs in
the networking diagram are not shown.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
124 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 65 ZXMP S320 POI NT- TO- POI NT NETWORK I NG
UserEthernetL
NEL
NEK
622Mbit/s
UserEthernetK
VLANID=10 VLANID=10

Configure the NE K and NE L for the transmission of 30 M Ethernet traffic
between them in the network as shown in the following sections.
Networking Analysis and Board
Configuration
According to the networking requirements, besides the functional boards,
the ZXMP S320 device needs to be configured with the following two
service boards:
O4CSD board: for 622 Mbit/s links
SFE4 board: for VLAN service
Determine the board type and quantity based on the service requirements
and capacity. Create NE K and NE L, and install boards for them according
to corresponding description in Chapter 1.
The board installations of NE K and NE L are shown in Figure 66 and
Figure 67 respectively.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 125
FI GURE 66 CARD MANAGEMENT DI AL OG BOX OF NE K

FI GURE 67 CARD MANAGEMENT DI AL OG BOX OF NE L

Configuring Card Property
Right-click the SFE4 board in the Card Management dialog box, and then
select the Property menu item in the pop-up shortcut menu to enter the
SFE4 Card Property dialog box. Click the Advanced button in the Card
Property dialog box to enter the Advanced dialog box, and configure the
card port properties, as shown in Figure 68.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
126 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 68 ADVANCED DI A L OG BOX OF SFE4 CARD


Configuring Data Port Attribute
The configuration of NE K is the same as that of NE L, which is described
as follows:
1. Configure user port
Port Use State: click User Port1 to enable the port.
VLAN Mode: select Access Mode because the traffic to be accessed
by the port does not have VLAN ID.
Duplex Mode: Auto
Speed: Auto
PVID: 10
The default values are adopted for other parameters.
2. Configure system port
Port Use State: click System Port1 to enable the port.
VLAN Mode: Trunk Mode.
Encapsulation Type: 4Byte 16Bit PPP CRC
Flow Control: it is selected for the traffic less than 100 M.
The default values are adopted for other parameters.


Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 127
Configuring Path Group
Click the Path Group Config tab in Figure 68 to enter the Path Group
Config page and bind the TU12 channel according to the Ethernet traffic.
In this example, both NE K and NE L should be bound with 15 TU12
channels to implement 30 M Ethernet traffic. The configuration
requirements are shown in Table 59.
TAB L E 59 PATH GROUP CONFI GURATI ON REQUI REMENTS
Parameter Configuration
Occupation (TU12 channel) 01 - 15
Concatenation mode Virtual concatenation
Channel group ID 1

After finishing the path group configuration, the Path Group Config page
of the SFE4 card is as shown in Figure 69.
FI GURE 69 PATH GROUP CONFI G PAGE

Configuring Port Capacity
Click the Set Port Capacity tab in the Advanced dialog box to enter the
Set Port Capacity page. Set channel group 1 of the corresponding NE for
the system port 1 of NE K and NE L respectively, as shown in Figure 70.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
128 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 70 SET PORT CAPACI TY PAGE

Configuring LCAS
Click the LCAS Config tab in the Advanced dialog box to enter the LCAS
Config page. Set the LCAS for the TU12 of system port 1 for NE K and NE
L according to the configuration listed in Table 60.
TAB L E 60 REQUI REMENTS OF L CAS CONFI GURATI ON
I tem Configuration
Port No. System Port1
LCAS Enable Selected
Direction Bi-Dir
Used (TU12 channel) 1 - 15

Taking NE L as example, Figure 71 shows its LCAS configuration.

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 129
FI GURE 71 L CAS CONFI G PAGE OF NE L

Configuring Data Card Property
Click the Data Card Property tab in the Advanced dialog box to enter
the Data Card Property page. Configure the parameters as follows:
Running Mode: Choose the VLAN Mode
MAC Address: Set the MAC address of NE K to 0x000000000001, and
set that of NE L to 0x000000000002.
The configuration of NE K is shown in Figure 72.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
130 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 72 DATA CARD PROPERTY PAGE OF NE K

Establishing Connection
Establish the optical connection between NE K and NE L according to the
connection configuration listed in Table 61 and the description in the
section of Connection Establishment of Chapter 1.
TAB L E 61 CONNECTI ON CONFI GURATI ON OF NE K AND NE L
Source Port Destination Port Connection Type
NE K: O4CSD[1-1-6], Port 1 NE L: O4CSD[1-1-6], Port 1
Bidirectional optical
connection

Creating User and VLAN
Select an NE in the client operation window, and then click the menu item
SNMS -> Customer Management to create a new customer in the pop-
up Customer Management dialog box.
The customer name is Customer A, and the customer ID is 1.
Setting VLAN
In the client operation window, select NE K and NE L. Click the menu item
Device Config -> Ethernet Management -> Configure Virtual LAN
with The Data Card to enter the Data Card VLAN Config dialog box.
1. Create a VLAN

Chapter 3 - Ethernet Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 131
In the VLAN Information list box, select Custmer A, and click the
Add VLAN button to create a VLAN in the New VLAN dialog box
according to the requirements listed in Table 62.
TAB L E 62 VL AN CONFI GURATI ON REQUI REMENTS
Parameter Configuration
VLAN Name VLAN
VLAN Start ID 10
VLAN End ID 10

2. Add ports to the VLAN
i. In the VLAN Information list box, select VLAN (10).
ii. In Card Ports Information list box, click after selecting User
Port1 and System Port1 of SFE4 card for NE K, User Port1 and
System Port1 for NE L respectively. Add these ports to the Board
Configured list box.
After the configuration, the dialog box is as shown in Figure 73.
FI GURE 73 DATA CARD VL AN CONFI G DI AL OG BOX


Configuring Timeslot
In the Data Card VLAN Cnfig dialog box as shown in Figure 73, click the
Service button to implement the timeslot configuration of NEs in the
Service Config dialog box.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
132 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The timeslot configuration of each NE is as follows, and all configurations
are bidirectional.
1. The timeslot configuration of NE K is as shown in Table 63.
TAB L E 63 TI MESL OT CONFI GURATI ON OF NE K
Ethernet Card Optical I nterface Card
Ethern
et card
VC12
Optical interface
card
AUG TUG3 TUG2 TU12
1 1 - 3
2 1 - 3
3 1 - 3
4 1 - 3
SFE4[1-
1-8]
01 - 15 O4CSD[1-1-6] 1 1
5 1 - 3

2. The timeslot configuration of NE L is as shown in Table 64.
TAB L E 64 TI MESL OT CONFI GURATI ON OF NE L
Ethernet Card Optical I nterface Card
Ethern
et card
VC12
Optical interface
card
AUG TUG3 TUG2 TU12
1 1 - 3
2 1 - 3
3 1 - 3
4 1 - 3
SFE4[1-
1-8]
01 - 15 O4CSD [1-1-6] 1 1
5 1 - 3

[Result]
The following two verification operations are supported in the normal
communication between NEs and the EMS.
In the client operation window, select NE K and L, and select the menu
item Maintenance -> Ethernet Maintenance -> Data Card Ports
Running State. The parameters of the ports of Ethernet card should be
same as the setting.
1. The user port 1 of the NE L SFE4 card should receive packets sent from
the computer connected with user port 1 of the NE K SFE4 card.


Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 133
Ch a p t e r 4
ATM Service Configuration

This chapter introduces the configuration flow ATM service in the ZXONM
E300. In addition, detailed operating steps and methods are described
with a networking example of ZXMP S360 NE with the ATM card of AP1S4.
Configuration Flow
The SDH network element equipped with ATM card can cooperate with
ZXONM E300 to implement the access, exchange, and bandwidth
convergence of ATM services.
Table 65 lists ATM cards supported by various SDH equipments.
TAB L E 65 ATM CARDS
Card Name and
compositions
Card ID
in EMS
User Port
Quantity
System Port
Quantity
Applicable
Equipment
AP1S8 AP1S 155M8 155M4
ZXMP S380
ZXMP S390
AP1x8 AP1S 155M8 155M4 ZXMP S385
AP1x4+OIS1x4 AP1x4 155M4 155M4
ZXMP S330
ZXMP S325
AP1S4 AP1S4 155M4 155M3 ZXMP S360
AP1S2 AP1S2 155M2 155M2 ZXMP S320
For ZXMP S330 and ZXMP S325, AP1x4 processes the service and OIS1x4 provides
the physical interfaces.



ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
134 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The configuration procedure of ATM service is as follows:
1. Install cards for NE
Double-click the NE icon in the client operation window to open the
Card Management dialog box. Install the ATM card, functional cards,
and optical line cards for adding/dropping ATM traffic.
2. Configure the ports of ATM card
i. Right-click the ATM card in the Card Management dialog box and
select the Property menu item in the shortcut menu to enter the
Card Property dialog box.
ii. Click the Advanced button to pop up the Advanced dialog box
iii. In the dialog box, enable the ports for the ATM service; configure
Interface, Speed, MaxVPI, MaxVCI and PvccVpiNum which keep the
default setting generally. The detailed descriptions are listed in
Table 66.
TAB L E 66 ATM ATTRI B UTES L I ST
Paramet
ers
Descriptions Remark
Port No.
Select the
needed system
port and user
port
For ZXMP S380, ZXMP S385 and ZXMP S390,
ports 1-8 of AP1S are user ports at ATM side,
ports 9-12 are system ports at system side.
For ZXMP S330 and ZXMP S325, ports 1-4 of
AP1x4 are user ports at ATM side, ports 5-8 are
system ports. When the board AP1x4 is seated
in slots 1, 2, 15 or 16, only ports 1-6 can be
available; when the board AP1x4 is seated in
slots 3-6, 11 or 14, only ports 1-8 can be
available.
For ZXMP S360, ports 1-4 of AP1S4 are user
ports at ATM side, ports 6-8 are system ports at
system side. Port 5 is not used at present.
For ZXMP S320, ports 1-2 of AP1S2 are user
ports at ATM side, ports 3-4 are system ports at
system side.
Interface
Include UNI or
NNI
Keep the default settings.
Speed
Set the port
speed
The maximum speed is 150000 kbit/s.
MaxVPI
Specify the
maximum
value of VPI
MaxVCI
Specify the
maximum
value of VCI
VPI is from 1 to 255 and VCI is from 1 to 16383 in
case of UNI interface; VPI is from 0 to 4095 and VCI
is from 1 to 16383 in case of NNI interface.
PvccVpi
Set the
maximum VPI
for VC
connection
The VP beyond the setting can only be configured as
Virtual Path Connection (VPC) but not Virtual
Channel Connection (VCC). For example, if
PvccVpi=4, it indicates the VP whose VPI is from 0
to 3 can be configured as VPC or VCC, the VP whose
VPI is over 4 can only be configured as VPC but not
VCC.

Chapter 4 - ATM Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 135
Tip: Generally, the default values are adopted. Therefore, simply enable the
port.
3. Establish PVC
Right-click the ATM card in the Card Management dialog box, and
select the Pvc Config menu item in the shortcut menu to pop up the
configuration dialog box.
Note: It is suggested that number of uni-directional PVC should be less than
10 k, number of bi-directional PVC should be less than 8 K.
i. Configure flows
In the PVC configuration dialog box, select query mode and click
the Flow Config button to configure flows in the Flow Argument
Setting dialog box. Input the flow type name, and select the
service type and parameters of flows.
Service type
CBR: Constant Bit Rate, for the service with a constant bit rate.
rtVBR: real-time Variable Bit Rate, for the transmission of real-
time traffic.
nrtVBR: non-real-time Variable Bit Rate. Similar to rtVBR but the
real-time feature is poorer than rtVBR.
UBR: Unspecified Bit Rate. The difference between UBR and VBR is
that VBR reserves some bandwidth for adjustment, while UBR finds
idle bandwidth by itself. If UBR finds idle bandwidth, it will occupy it.
If not, it cannot adjust the bit rate.
ABR: Available Bit Rate
Major parameters
PCR: Peak Cell Rate, with the unit of cell/second.
1 cell/second = 53 8 bit/s.
SCR: Sustainable Cell Rate, with the unit of cell/second.
1 cell/second = 53 8 bit/s.
MBS: Maximum Burst Size, with the unit of cell.
1 cell = 53 8 bit.
Configure PCR, SCR or MBS, or all of them according to the service
type.
ii. Configure the terminal point
In the PVC configuration dialog box, click the TTP Config button to
enter the TTP Config dialog box. Create TTP and select the PVC
type, VPI&VCI, flow type and direction for the terminal point in the
TTP Creation dialog box after clicking the New button.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
136 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Note: Only in case of OAM test, should the section point, VP connection end
point, OAM end-to-end monitoring, and AIS insertion point in the TTP type area be
set.
iii. Configure PVC
In the PVC configuration dialog box, select the Config radio button
in the Mode area. And then establish the working PVC or protection
PVC between the ports of ATM card according to the requirements
of the ATM traffic.
Note: For the connnection of VCI=4, the user type should be OAM. The rest
of the connections should be normal.
To perform the local switching on the ATM layer, create PVC
connections between the ATM ports.
To implement long-haul transmission of ATM traffic through optical
paths, create PVC connections between the ATM port and the
system port.
Configure revertive protection PVC according to the following
descriptions:
Establish a working PVC and a protection PVC, select the protection
PVC and click Apply button. Then, Revertive check box can be
selected. Select the Revertive check box (A symbol indicates
the item is selected), then click Apply button.
4. Configure the timer
In Card Management dialog box, right-click the ATM board and
click Timer Set in the shortcut menu to pop up Timer Set dialog
box. In the Timer Set dialog box, set the PVC revertive time and
the protection delay time, the parameter descriptions are listed in
Table 67.
TAB L E 67 PARAMETER DESCRI PTI ONS I N TI MER SET DI AL OG BOX OF ATM
BOARD
Parameters Descriptions Remark
Timer Type
Include Keep
Timer and
Revert Timer
Keep Timer: Once the working VP or VC is
failed, if the failure duration is beyond the
setting in Keep Timer, the service would be
switched to protection VP or VC.
Revert Timer: Once the working VC or VP is
reverted to the normal status, if the
working duration is up to the setting in
Revert Timer, the service would be
switched to the working VP or VC.
Prt PVC timer
The time here
can be modified,
the unit is
100ms.
The default setting of Keep Timer is 500ms, and
that of Revert Timer is 720000ms (i.e. 720s).

Chapter 4 - ATM Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 137
Note: Timer configuration is a selectable step. The default setting of Keep
Timer is 500 ms and the Revert Timer is 720000 ms (i.e. 720 s).
5. Multiplex ATM traffic to the optical card of the NE
To transmit ATM traffic over a long distance through the SDH network,
select the NE to add/drop ATM traffic in the client operation window.
Then select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management ->
Service Config to pop up the Service config dialog box.
In the Service Config dialog box, configure the ATM traffic to the
optical card through the system port of the ATM card.
6. Save ATM data
Checkpoint: Make sure that the NE processing ATM traffic is online and in
normal communication with the EMS before saving ATM data.
Select the menu item Data Save in the shortcut menu of ATM card to
save the ATM configuration data to the FLASH file of the card.
Tip: To implement the PVC connection and saving configuration data, you can
also perform the following steps:
Select the NE in the client operation window, and then select Device Config -
> ATM Management to pop up the ATM Management dialog box.
In this dialog box, select the menu item Configure -> Pvc Config to
configure the PVC connection, Select Board Data Manage -> Data Save to dump
the configuration data.
7. Configure optical line cards of the passed-by site
Select the passed-by site icon in the client operation window, and then
select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management ->
Service Config to enter the Service Config dialog box.
In this dialog box, establish the pass-through connection for the optical
line card.
Configuration Example
Suppose there are two network elements, M and N, between which ATM
services should be configured. ZXMP S360 equipment is adopted for NE M
and N. The link rate is 2.5 Gbit/s. The type of ATM services between these
two NEs is CBR without protection, and the rate is 2 Mbit/s.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
138 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The networking diagram is illustrated in Figure 74, where the passed-by
sites are not shown.
FI GURE 74 NETWORK I NG EXAMPL E FOR ATM SERVI CE

Networking Analysis and Card
Configuration
Network Analysis
ATM cards can perform the access, switching and bandwidth convergence
functions for ATM traffic, thus greatly improve the bandwidth utilization.
In this networking example, the ATM card AP1S4 is used to access the
ATM service.
The ATM service is converged to the optical card and transmitted over a
long distance, as shown in Figure 75.
FI GURE 75 ATM SERVI CE REL ATI ONSHI P

The parameter requirements to access the ATM service are listed in Table
68.
TAB L E 68 ATM SERVI CE REQUI REMENTS
Parameter Value
Enabled port
Enabled user port: Port 1
Enabled system port: Port 6
Service type Constant Bit Rate (CBR)
Peak Cell Rate (PCR) About 5000 cell/second (1 cell/second = 53 8 bit/s)
Connection type VCC
VPI 10

Chapter 4 - ATM Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 139
Parameter Value
VCI 100
To ease the operation, the same VPI and VCI are adopted for the port 1 and port 6
of both NEs. In the real configuration, different VPI and VCI can also be used.
Card Configuration
According to the above networking requirements, the following cards
should be configured in the NE M and N: OI16 card and LP16 card for
STM-16 links, AP1S4 card for the ATM service.
After creating NEs, enter the Card Management dialog box and install
cards for them respectively, as shown in Figure 76 and Figure 77.
FI GURE 76 CARD MANAGEMENT DI AL OG BOX OF NE M


ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
140 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 77 CARD MANAGEMENT DI AL OG BOX OF NE N


Configuring Port
Take NE M as an example. Configure the port of AP1S4 card.
1. Right-click the AP1S4 card in the Card Management dialog box of NE
M. Then select the Property menu item in the shortcut menu to pop
up the Card Property dialog box.
2. Click the Advanced button to pop up the Advanced dialog box.
3. Select port 1. And then select the Start Use check box.
4. Click the Send button to enable the port 1.
5. Select port 6. And then select the Start Use check box.
6. Click the Send button to enable the port 6.
7. Adopt default values for other parameters.
After the configuration, the dialog box is as shown in Figure 78.

Chapter 4 - ATM Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 141
FI GURE 78 CARD PORT CONFI GURATI ON

The port configuration of AP1S4 card in NE N is same as that of the setting
in NE M.
Establishing Connection
Establish the optical connection between NE M and N based on the
connection relation listed in Table 69. Refer to the section of Establishing
Connection in Chapter 1 for detailed steps to establish optical connections.
TAB L E 69 CONNECTI ON CONFI GURATI ON
Source Port Destination Port Connection Type
NE M: OI16[1-1-5], Port 1 NE N: OI16[1-1-5], Port 1 Bidirectional optical connection
Establishing PVC Connection
Take NE M as example. The configuration of NE N is same as that of NE M.
Right-click the AP1S4 card in the Card Management dialog box of NE M,
and then select the PVC Config menu item in the shortcut menu, to pop
up the PVC configuration dialog box, as shown in Figure 79.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
142 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 79 PVC CONFI GURATI ON DI AL OG BOX

1. Create the flow
Click the Flow Config button in Figure 79 to pop up the Flow
Argument Setting dialog box. Create a flow with the parameters as
shown in Table 70.
Use the default values for other parameters not listed in the table 70.
TAB L E 70 FL OW CONFI GURATI ON REQUI REMENTS
Parameter Configuration
Flow type name Flow 1
Service type CBR
PCR 500 cell/second

2. Configure terminal point
Click the TTP Config button in Figure 79 to pop up the TTP Config
dialog box. Set the terminal point in the TTP Config dialog box for the
ports 1 and 6 as shown in Table 71.
The configuration of port 1 and port 6 is same. Use the default values
for other parameters not listed in the table 71.
Table 71 TTP Configuration Requirements
Parameter Configuration
PVC type VCC
VPI 10
VCI 100
Flow type Flow 1
Direction Bidirectional
3. Configure PVC connection

Chapter 4 - ATM Service Configuration
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 143
Select the Config radio button in the Mode area in Figure 79. And
then establish the PVC connection between port 1 and port 6 of the
AP1S4 card, as shown in Figure 80.
FI GURE 80 PVC CONNECTI ON CONFI GURATI ON

4. Multiplex ATM traffic
Select NE M in the client operation window, and then select the menu
item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service Config to pop
up the Service Config dialog box.
Connect the AU4 of AP1S4[1-1-3] Port 6 to the AU4 (1) of OI16[1-1-5]
Port 1, as shown in Figure 81.
FI GURE 81 SERVI CE CONFI G DI AL OG BOX



ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
144 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Configuring Passed-by NEs
Select the passed-by site icon in the client operation window, and then
select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Service
Config to enter the Service Config dialog box.
Establish the pass-through connection for the AU channel of the passed-by
the optical line card.



Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 145
Ch a p t e r 5
Common SDH Management
Operations

This chapter describes some common management functions of SDH NEs.
Setting Misconnection Resistance
[Purpose]
To enable the misconnection resistance function to prevent the path
misconnection during protection switching for the MSP ring.
[Applicable NEs]
The applicable NEs are ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S325,
ZXMP S385 and ZXMP S200.
[Steps]
1. Make preparations
i. Select an NE in the client operation window, and select the menu
item Device Config -> Common Management -> MS
Protection Config menu item to pop up the MS Protection
Config dialog box.
ii. In the MS Group List box, select a MS group to enable
misconnection resistance, and click Next to enter the APS ID
Config dialog box.
iii. Click the Next button to pop up the MS Protection dialog box.
2. Enable the misconnection resistance function
i. Select the Config radio button in the Operation Mode area in the
MS Protection dialog box.
ii. Click the More button to pop up the MS Property Config dialog
box.
iii. Select the Resist Error Enable check box, as shown in Figure 82.
iv. Click the Apply button to confirm the operation.


ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
146 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Note: The misconnection resistance function is enabled by default.
FI GURE 82 MS PROPERTY CONFI G DI AL OG BOX


3. Select the misconnection resistance mode
i. Click the Previous button in the MS Protection dialog box to
return to the APS ID Config dialog box.
ii. Click Previous in the APS ID Config dialog box to return to the
MS Protection Config dialog box.
iii. Click the Squelch Mode button to pop up the Set Squelch Mode
dialog box, as shown in Figure 83.
FI GURE 83 SET SQUEL CH MODE DI AL OG BOX


iv. Select the condition to enable error resistance from the Squelch
Mode drop-down list box for the selected protection group (MSPG).

Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 147
v. Select the NE in the NE Name list, and click the Send button to
issue the error resistance setting to the selected NE.
The Reset button can be clicked to restore the default misconnection
resistance settings. With the default settings, the misconnection
resistance function will be enabled only when all destinations or all
sources are lost.
4. Save the misconnection resistance mode
Enter the MS Protection dialog box again and click the Save
Topology button to save the misconnection resistance settings.
5. Repeat step 1 to step 4 to enable, set, and save the misconnection
resistance function for the other NEs in the MS protection group.

Note: The misconnection resistance mode must be the same for each NE in
the MS protection group.

6. Calculate the misconnection resistance
i. Select an NE in the client operation window, and select the SNMS
> Circuit Service Management menu item to pop up the Circuit
Service Management dialog box.
ii. Select the APSBusyMgr -> CalMisconn menu item. A message
box will pop up prompting that the calculate misconnection is
success for the successful operation.
7. Send the misconnection resistance service relationship
i. Select the APSBusyMgr -> QueryMisconn menu item in the
Circuit Service Management dialog box to pop up the MSPG
Filter dialog box.
ii. Select all MSPG and click OK to pop up the Query APS
Misconnection dialog box.
iii. Click the Query NE State button to query APS service condition
and send the command as well.
[Result]
There will be no misconnection during protection switching for the MSP
ring if the command is successfully sent
Setting APS Byte
[Purpose]
The Automatic Protection Switching (APS) byte serves for transmitting the
MSP switching information. The multiplex section protection switching will
normally work when the APS byte is correctly transmitted.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
148 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The value of APS byte ranges from 0 to 3, and the default value is 0.
An NE can be included in multiple MSP groups, when it has been
configured into a logical subnet.
The ZXONM E300 supports the setting of APS byte in the unit of port, thus
guaranteeing normal working of each MSP group.
The principles to set the APS byte are described as follows.
The APS byte of two ports physically connected in the same MS ring
must be the same, to guarantee proper transmission of APS byte
between two nodes.
If one port belongs to different MSP groups, the APS byte of each MSP
group must be unique.
ZXMP S320 and ZXMP S360 do not support the setting of APS byte,
and their default APS byte is 0. Therefore, the APS byte must be set to
zero for the optical ports connected with the ZXMP S320 or ZXMP S360
equipment.
[Applicable NEs]
The applicable NEs are ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S325,
ZXMP S385 and ZXMP S200.
Take the MSP ring 1, consisting of NE A, B, C, and D in the network
presented in Chapter 1, as an example.
[Steps]
1. Configure the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring
Create a MSP group and configure the MS protection relation according
to the description in the section of Configuration of Two-fiber
Bidirectional MSP Ring in Chapter 1.
2. In the MS Protection dialog box, check the APS byte of the abutting
port at the neighbor NE, as shown in Figure 84;

Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 149
FI GURE 84 MS PROTECTI ON DI AL OG BOX

3. Select the Config radio button in the Operation Mode area;
4. Modify the APS byte of the local port to be same as the value displayed
in Neighbor Ne Aps Byte;
5. Click the Apply button to save the APS value;
6. Repeat step 1 to step 7 to set and save the APS byte for the NE B, C,
and D in the MSP group respectively.
[Result]
Check the normal working of all NEs.
Configuring DCC
[Purpose]
The data communication channel (DCC) carries the communication data
among NEs, including the regenerator section DCC bytes (DCCr) and the
multiplex section DCC byte (DCCm).
Table 72 lists the DCC use configuration supported by NEs of different
types.
TAB L E 72 DCC USE CONFI GURATI ON
DCC Configuration Default Configuration Applicable NE and Card
DCCr
(Byte: D1 - D3 )
Optical interface card with
maximum rate of STM-16
All SDH NEs
DCCr + DCCm
(Byte: D1 - D12)
Optical interface card at the
rate of STM-64
Optical cards of ZXMP S380, ZXMP
S390, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S325, and
ZXMP S385; and optical cards and

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
150 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
DCC Configuration Default Configuration Applicable NE and Card
ET1 card of ZXMP S200.
2 M tributary Not supported ET1 board of ZXMP S200

Through configuring the DCC use and changing the DCC byte of the port,
the following functions can be provided:
The communication rate of NEs will be improved with the DCC
configuration of DCCr + DCCm.
As long as the DCC byte of the abutting optical interfaces keeps the
same value, any line port can use DCCr or DCCm to carry the
communication data separately.
When the DCC is not used for optical interfaces, non-communication
data can be transmitted through the pass-through connection between
DCCr and DCCm among different ports with the overhead cross-
connect function of the EMS.
The DCC byte can be configured separately and differently in the
receiving direction and the transmitting direction.

Caution:
The DCC must be configured as DCCr for the optical card used for regeneration.
If the DCC is used to transmit communication data, the DCC setting must be
the same for the abutting optical interfaces to guarantee the communication data
transmission.

[Applicable NEs]
The applicable NEs areZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S325,
ZXMP S385 and ZXMP S200.
[Steps]
1. Select an applicable NE in the topology.
2. Select the menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> DCC
Use Set to enter the DCC Use Set dialog box.
Tip: You can also enter the DCC Use Set dialog box in the following way:
Double-click an applicable NE in the topology to pop up the Card Management
dialog box. And then right-click an optical card to be modified, and select the DCC
Use Set menu item in the shortcut menu to pop up the DCC Use Set dialog box.


Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 151
3. In the Resource list box of the dialog box, select a card. Then click
the button and change it to the button. The right side of the
dialog box will display all the ports and DCC configuration information
of the card.
4. Select the DCC use byte of the local port in the dialog box according to
the DCC use of the abutting optical interface, as shown in Figure 85.
FI GURE 85 DCC USE SET DI AL OG BOX


The Advanced check box is valid only for ZXMP S330, ZXMP S385,
ZXMP S200 and ZXMP S325 equipment. With Advance check box
selected, the DCC byte in the receiving and sending direction of the
optical interface can be set separately, including DCCr, DCCm,
DCCr + DCCm, and Not use DCC.
With General check box selected, the DCC byte in the receiving
direction and sending direction of the optical interface will be set at
the same time, including Use extended DCC and Not use extend
DCC.
For ET1 board for ZXMP S200, set whether the 2 M tributary port 5-
port 8 support ECC mode or not. The ECC mode includes Not
Supported, Optical ECC and Electrical ECC, among which, the
electrical ECC means transferring the ECC information by 2 M cable
directly, the optical ECC means transferring the ECC information by
multiplexing the 2 M tributary signal with ECC information into the
timeslot of optical line board (i.e. sending the ECC information by
optical line board).
5. Click the Apply button to save the DCC configuration.
Note:
For the board to be used as REG board, the ECC mode must be DCCr.
If the data is transferred by DCC path, the DCC of docking ports must be set in
same mode in order to gurantee the smoothly communication.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
152 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
[Result]
After setting the DCC use, check if the EMS message can be transferred
normally when transmitting communication data via DCC.
Configuring Static Route
[Purpose]
The static route between the managed equipment and the EMS should be
established when the EMS manages the equipment through the Data
Communications Network (DCN).
Example:
In Figure 86, IP addresses of NE5-NE8 are in 192.193.16.0 Network
(subnet mask is 255.255.255.0), IP addresses of NE9-NE12 are in
192.193.10.0 Network (subnet mask is 255.255.255.0).
To enable ZXONM E300 to manage NE5 to NE12, the static route must be
configured between NE5 and NE9.
FI GURE 86 DCN NETWORK I NG EXAMPL E
DCN
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
NE6
NE7
NE8
NE12
NE9
NE10
NE11
EMS(10.168.20.100)
Router1
Hub
Router2(192.193.16.33)
Router3
(192.193.10.55)


Table 73 lists the route information of NE5 and NE9.
TAB L E 73 STATI C ROUTE I NFORMATI ON
NE
I P Address
NE5 NE9
Destination IP address
Equals to the EMS IP
address: 10.168.20.100
Equals to the EMS IP address:
10.168.20.100
Destination mask address
Equals to the EMS mask
address: 255.255.255.0
Equals to the EMS mask
address: 255.255.255.0

Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 153
NE
I P Address
NE5 NE9
Gateway IP address
Equals to the IP address of
Router 2: 192.193.16.33
Equals to the IP address of
Router 3: 192.193.10.55

[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
Take Figure 86 as an example.
[Steps]
1. Select NE 5 and NE 9 in the client operation window, and select the
menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> Static Route
Config to enter the NE Static Route Config dialog box.
2. Suppose NE5 has been selected. Click the Add button to add a piece of
route information in the dialog box.
3. Fill in the route information of NE5 according to the configuration
shown in Table 73.
4. Click the Apply button to save and send the command, as shown in
Figure 87.
FI GURE 87 NE STATI C ROUTE CONFI GURATI ON DI AL OG BOX ( NE5)

5. Select NE 9 in the Resource list box. Then click the button and
change it to the button. The right side of the dialog box will show
that the currently selected NE is NE9.
6. Repeat step 2 to step 4 to fill out route information of NE9 according to
Table 73. The NE Static Route Config dialog box of NE 9 is as shown
in Figure 88.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
154 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 88 NE STATI C ROUTE CONFI GURATI ON DI AL OG BOX ( NE9)

[Result]
Check that the EMS can manage NE5 to NE12.
Configuring Gateway NE
[Purpose]
EMS can communicate with the managed NEs by gateway NE when the
transmission equipment is managed by Data Communication Network
(DCN).
Gateway NE, which is connected with EMS or DCN, forwards the
information among other NEs and EMS. Master and slave gateway NEs can
be set by EMS in order to avoid communication interruption in case of any
malfunctioning of the master gateway NE.
Gateway NE can isolate the IP address of transmission equipment and the
address of DCC network in order to save the resource of users IP address
and router.
Example:
In Figure 89, the transmission network is composed of NE1-NE12 which
are connected to EMS via DCN network. NE6 and NE9 are directly
connected with DCN.

Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 155
FI GURE 89 DCN NETWORK ( 1)

Suppose DCN has two network segments which are 10.168.35.0 (mask is
255.255.255.0) and 10.168.36.0 (mask is 255.255.255.0). The IP
addresses of EMS are 10.168.35.10 and 10.168.36.11, and the IP
addresses of NE6 and NE9 are 10.168.35.9 and 10.168.36.9 separately.
The IP addresses of other NEs are 192.*.*.*.
In order to enable the EMS managing all of the NEs, NE6 and NE9 should
be configured as gateway NEs; meanwhile, NE6 or NE9 can also be set as
the gateway NE for each other to enhance the reliability of communication.
[Applicable NEs]
The NEs, which can be set as gateway NEs, are ZXMP S385, ZXMP S390,
ZXMP S330, ZXMP S200, ZXMP S325 and ZXMP S200.
Take Figure 89 as an example.
[Steps]
1. Configure NE6 and NE9 as gateway NE
i. In EMS client operation window, select NE6 and NE9 and click the
menu item Device Config -> Set The NE as Gateway to pop up
Set GNE dialog box.
ii. Select NE6 and NE9 from Select Resource list box, and then click
button to add the NE6 and NE9 to GNE list box.
iii. Click Communication Addr button to pop up Set GNE IP dialog
box. The parameter descriptions are listed in Table 74.


ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
156 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
TAB L E 74 PARAMETER DESCRI PTI ONS OF SETTI NG GATEWAY NE
Parameters NE6 NE9
Host IP
Address
10.168.35.10 10.168.36.11
If Use Yes No
Host IP Address means the IP address of EMS computer. For master and
slave NEs, Host IP Address should be different.

iv. Click Apply button to save and forward command.
2. Configure static router for NE6 and NE9
In EMS client operation window, select NE6 and NE9 and click the
menu item Device Config -> SDH Management -> NE Static
Router Config to pop up NE Static Router Config dialog box. Set
the static router according to Table 75, the steps to configure the
static router according to Configuring Static Route.
TAB L E 75 PARAMETER DESCRI PTI ONS OF CONFI GURI NG STATI C ROUTER FOR NE6
AND NE9
Parameters NE6 NE9
DestIPAddr
DCN network segment
(10.168.35.0)
DCN network segment
(10.168.36.0)
DestMaskAddr
DCN subnetwork mask
(255.255.255.0)
DCN subnetwork mask
(255.255.255.0)
GatewayIPAddr DCN gateway (10.168.35.1) DCN gateway (10.168.36.1)
If Start Yes No
3. Configure NE6 or NE9 as the gateway NE for each other
i. In the EMS client operation window, select NE6 and NE9 and click
the menu item Device Config -> Set Master Slave GNE to pop
up Set Master/Slave GNE dialog box.
ii. In the Set Master/Slave GNE dialog box, set NE6 as the master
gateway NE for NE9 and set NE9 as the master gateway NE for NE6.
iii. Click Apply button to make the configurations valid.
4. Repeat step 3 to set NE6 as the gateway NE of NE1, NE2, NE3, NE4,
NE5 and NE7, then, set NE9 as the slave gateway NE of these NEs.
5. Repeat step3 to set NE9 as the gateway NE for NE8, NE10, NE11 and
NE12, then set NE6 as the slave gateway NE for these NEs.
[Result]
Take Figure 89 as an example, EMS can manage NE1-NE12 normally.

Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 157
Setting Managing Capacity
Expansion
[Purpose]
The capacity of network can be expanded through adding network element
nodes to the original optical network and sending the configuration data to
related NEs.
The expansion management is applicable to the following three cases:
Add nodes to an SDH network without MS protection
Add nodes to a MS protection ring
Add nodes to a MS protection chain
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
To add a node into an SDH network without MS protection
Suppose both NE 1 and NE 2 are ZXMP S380 equipment and the aggregate
rate is 2.5 Gbit/s. The new node to be added is NE3 which is ZXMP S380.
Figure 90 illustrates the network before and after the capacity expansion.
FI GURE 90 NETWORK I NG DI AGRAM OF CAPACI TY EXPA NSI ON WI THOUT MUL TI PL EX
SECTI ON PROTECTI ON


1. Double-click the NE3 icon in the client operation window to enter the
Card Management dialog box.
2. Considering the aggregate rate of the network and the optical
connection demand after expansion, install OL16 cards into slot 3 and
slot 6 of NE3 as well as necessary functional cards and service cards.
3. Select NE1, NE2, and NE3 in the client operation window, and then
select SNMS -> Expand to enter the Expand dialog box.
4. Select the Expand -> Expand Guide menu item to enter the
Expand-Select Link & New NE dialog box.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
158 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
5. Select NE1 in the SrcNE drop-down list box, and NE2 in the DestNE
box. Then optical connection information between the two NEs will be
listed in the dialog box.
6. Select NE3 in the NewNE drop-down list box.
7. Click the optical connection between the 3#OL16 card of NE1 and the
3#OL16 card of NE2 in the dialog box. Then click the Next button to
enter the Expand-Modify Link dialog box.
8. Configure the optical cards of NE3 that connect with NE1 and NE2
according to the optical connection relationship listed in Table 76.
TAB L E 76 CONNECTI ON REL ATI ONSHI PS
Source NE Destination NE
NE 3: OL16[1-1-3], Port 1 NE 1: OL16[1-1-3], Port 1
NE 3: OL16[1-1-6], Port 1 NE 2: OL16[1-1-3], Port 1
9. Click the Next button in the Expand-Modify Link dialog box to enter
the Expand-Confirm NE Info dialog box, and save the expansion
configuration in the EMS database, as shown in Figure 91.
FI GURE 91 SAVE EXPANSI ON CONFI GURATI ON I N EMS DATAB ASE

10. Click OK to enter the Expand-Send NE Info dialog box to send the
NE modification information, and then select the sending mode from
the Ts. Mode drop-down list box.

Note: The SendPart mode is recommended to avoid service interruption
during sending timeslots.


Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 159
11. Click the Send button. The configuration will be sent to the NEs if NEs
can normally communicate with the EMS.
To add a node into a MS protection ring
Suppose NE4, NE5 and NE6 form a four-fiber MS protection group with the
ID 6. These all are ZXMP S390 equipment. And the APS IDs of NE4, NE5
and NE6 are 0, 1 and 2 respectively. The new node to be added is NE7,
and it is ZXMP S390 equipment as well.
Figure 92 shows the network before and after the expansion.
FI GURE 92 EXPANSI ON OF MS PROTECTI ON RI NG NETWORK

1. Double click the NE7 icon in the client operation window to enter the
Card Management dialog box.
2. Considering the rate of the network and the optical connection demand
after expansion, install OL64 cards into slot 3, 6, 12 and 16 of NE7 in
addition to necessary functional cards and service cards.
3. Select NE4, NE5, NE6 and NE7 in the client operation window, and
select the SNMS -> Expand menu item to enter the Expand dialog
box.
4. Select the Expand -> Expand Guide menu item in the Expand dialog
box to enter the Expand-Select Link & New NE dialog box.
5. Select NE6 in SrcNE and NE4 in DestNE. The dialog box lists the
optical connection information between these two NEs.
6. Select NE7 in NewNE.
7. Click an optical connection in the dialog box, then click Next to enter
the Expand-Modify Link dialog box, and change the optical
connection card of NE7 according to the optical connection relationship
listed in Table 77.
TAB L E 77 CONNECTI ON CONFI GURATI ON ( NE7)
Source Destination
NE6: OL64[1-1-3], Port 1 NE7: OL64[1-1-6], Port 1
NE6: OL64[1-1-12], Port 1 NE7: OL64[1-1-15], Port 1
NE7: OL64[1-1-3], Port 1 NE4: OL64[1-1-6], Port 1
NE7: OL64[1-1-12, Port 1 NE4: OL64[1-1-15], Port 1


ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
160 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
8. Click Next in the Expand-Modify Link dialog box to enter the MS
Ring page of the Expand-Modify MS Group dialog box, and select 3
in APS ID.
9. Click Next to enter the Expand-Confirm NE Info dialog box, and
save the expansion configuration in the EMS database, as shown in
Figure 93.
FI GURE 93 SAVE EXPANSI ON CONFI GURATI ON I N EMS DATAB ASE


10. Click OK to enter the Expand-Send NE Info dialog box to send the
NE modification information, and then select the sending mode from
the Ts. Mode drop-down list box of NE7.

Note: The SendPart mode is recommended, to avoid service interruption
during sending timeslots.

11. Click Send to send the information to NE7 while it is in normal
communication with the EMS.
To add a node to a MS protection chain
Suppose both NE10 and NE11 are ZXMP S330 equipment and the link rate
is 2.5 Gbit/s. They form a 1+1 MS protection chain named 1+1MSLink,
with the ID 3.
The new node to be added is NE12, and the NE type is ZXMP S330.
Figure 94 shows the network before and after the expansion.

Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 161
FI GURE 94 EXPANSI ON OF MS PROTECTI ON L I NK NETWORK
NE10 NE11
5# 5#
6# 6#
1+1 MSLink (2.5 Gbit/s)
NE10 NE12
5# 5#
6# 6#
Beforeexpansion
NE11
11# 5#
12# 6#
Afterexpansion
1+1 MSLink (2.5 Gbit/s) 1+1 MSLink-n(2.5 Gbit/s)

1. Double click the NE12 icon in the client operation window to enter the
Card Management dialog box.
2. Considering the rate of the network and the optical connection demand
after expansion, install OL64 cards into slot 5, 6, 11 and 12 of NE12 in
addition to necessary functional cards and service cards.
3. Select NE10,NE 11 and NE12 in the client operation window, and select
the menu item SNMS -> Expand to enter the Expand dialog box.
4. Select the Expand -> Expand Guide menu item in the Expand dialog
box to enter the Expand-Select Link & New NE dialog box.
5. Select NE10 in SrcNE and NE11 in DestNE. The dialog box lists the
optical connection information between these two NEs.
6. Select NE12 in NewNE.
7. Click an optical connection in the dialog box, then click Next to enter
the Expand-Modify Link dialog box, and change the optical
connection card of NE12 according to the optical connection
relationship listed in Table 78.
TAB L E 78 CONNECTI ON CONFI GURATI ON ( NE12)
Source Destination
NE10: OL16[1-1-5], Port 1 NE12: OL16[1-1-5], Port 1
NE10: OL16[1-1-6], Port 1 NE12: OL16[1-1-6], Port 1
NE12: OL16[1-1-11], Port 1 NE11: OL16[1-1-5], Port 1
NE12: OL16[1-1-12], Port 1 NE11: OL16[1-1-6], Port 1
8. Click Next in the Expand-Modify Link dialog box to enter the MS
Chain page of the Expand-Modify MS Group dialog box.
ZXONM E300 automatically classifies NE10 and NE12 into the original
protection group, and NE12 and NE11 into a new protection group
(with the group ID as 5 by default), as shown in Figure 95.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
162 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 95 MS CHAI N PAGE OF EXPAND- MODI FY MS GROUP DI AL OG BOX

9. Modify the name of the protection group formed by NE12 and NE11 as
1+1MSLink-n, and click Next to enter the Expand-Confirm NE Info
dialog box and save the expansion configuration, as shown in Figure 96.
FI GURE 96 SAVE EXPANSI ON CONFI GURATI ON TO EMS DATAB ASE

10. Click OK to enter the Expand-Send NE Info dialog box to send the
NE modification information, and then select the sending mode from
the Ts. Mode drop-down list box.
Note: The SendPart mode is recommended, to avoid service interruption
during sending timeslots.
11. Click Send to send the information to NE12 while it is in normal
communication with the EMS.
[Result]
The NE topology structure meets the expansion requirements in the
client operation window.
If the expansion data have been sent to the NE successfully, the
original traffic will be transmitted normally after the expansion.

Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 163
Setting Circuit Auto Search
[Purpose]
Circuit auto search function can automatically search the timeslots that
have not been used by circuit, and then use them to create circuit.
By creating circuit, the management of timeslots turns into the
management of end-to-end service. For example, user can add description
information to circuit, and query bandwidth of data service circuit in the
data view of EMS.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Step]
1. In the client operation window, click the SNMS -> Circuit Service
Management menu item to enter the Circuit Service Management
dialog box.
2. In the Circuit Service Management dialog box, click the Circuit
Management -> Circuit Auto Search menu item to pop up the NE
Filter dialog box.
3. Select the NE that needs auto search of circuit, and click the OK button.
[Result]
The EMS client operation window will pop up a prompt box, indicating the
number of circuits found.
Setting Circuit Query
[Purpose]
Query the circuit configuration information of the NE, including the basic
circuit information, topology structure, relation between the client layer
circuit and the service layer circuit, and the circuit-related alarms and
performances.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
Take the networking case in Chapter 1 as an example.
[Steps]
1. Select the menu item SNMS -> Circuit Service Management in the
client operation window to enter the Circuit Service Management
dialog box.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
164 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
2. Select the menu item Circuit Management -> Query to enter the
Filter dialog box.
3. Set Port A as E and Port Z as B. For other items, just adopt the
default values.
4. Click OK to enter the Circuit Query dialog box.
If the command is sent successfully, the Circuit Query dialog box will
display the service configuration information between NE E and NE B,
as shown in Figure 97.
FI GURE 97 CI RCUI T QUERY DI AL OG BOX

Select a circuit from the list box, and the Property, Port, Channel,
SNC or SNCP page will show the detailed information of this circuit
respectively.
Select a circuit from the list box, and click to query the topology
structure of the circuit.
If the selected circuit is a service layer circuit, select the Circuit ->
Client Layer Circuit menu item to query the information of the client
layer circuit included at the service layer.
Select a circuit from the list box, and select the Alarm -> Query
Circuit CurAlarm or Alarm -> Circuit HisAlarm menu item to query
the current alarm or history alarm related to this circuit.
Select a circuit from the list box, and select the Performance ->
Circuit CurPerf or Performance -> Circuit HisPerf menu item to
query the current performance or history performance related to this
circuit.

Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 165
Setting Broadcast Circuit Query
[Purpose]
The configuration information of a broadcast circuit includes the basic
circuit information, topology structure, relationship between the client
layer circuit and the service layer circuit, and the circuit-related alarm and
performance.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
1. Select the menu item SNMS -> Circuit Service Management in the
client operation window to enter the Circuit Service Management
dialog box.
2. Select the Circuit Management -> Query BC Circuit Grp menu item
to enter the Query BC Circuit Grp dialog box.
3. Click the NE drop-down list box and select the start NE of the
broadcast circuit.
4. Select the service speed of the broadcast circuit in the Speed area.
5. Click the Refresh button.
If the command is sent successfully, the Query BC Circuit Grp dialog
box will display the circuit information meeting the query conditions, as
shown in Figure 98.
FI GURE 98 QUERY BC CI RCUI T GRP DI AL OG BOX

Select a circuit from the list box and the information of this circuit
group will be shown in the Description area.
Select a circuit from the list box, and click Query BC Circuit to enter
the Circuit Query dialog box as shown in Figure 97, including the
basic circuit information, topology, relationship between the client layer
circuit and the service layer circuit, and the alarms and performances.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
166 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Setting NE Auto Search
[Purpose]
The auto search of NE function can search the NEs that are running and
have not been managed by the current manager, and then upload the NEs
data, so as to enable the EMS to manage these NEs.
Two kinds of search methods are available:
Search All: specify the start IP address of NE. The EMS shall search
the NE with the start IP address first, and then search all the NEs with
IP addresses greater than the start IP address and their corresponding
optical links.
Search from Ne: specify the NEs manageable by the EMS. The EMS
will search all the NEs and optical links, or optical links only, connected
with the specified NEs.
[Applicable NEs]
ZXMP S385, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S200, ZXMP
S325
[Steps]
To specify the start IP address and search SDH NE and
corresponding optical links:
1. In the client operation window, click the Device Config -> Search
SDH Ne and Link menu item to pop up the Search SDH Ne and
Link dialog box, as shown in Figure 99.

Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 167
FI GURE 99 SEARCH SDH NE AND L I NK DI AL OG BOX ( SEARCH AL L )

2. Choose the acknowledgement mode in the Ack drop-down list box for
Manual Ack or Auto Ack.
3. The default search method is to specify the start IP address of NE and
search all the NEs and optical links. Therefore, input the start IP
address of NE in the Start IP text box.
4. Click the Begin Search button to enter the Ack Searched Ne dialog
box which displays the information of NEs found and the error
information, as shown in Figure 100.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
168 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 100 ACK SEARCHED NE DI AL OG BOX

5. If the Manual Ack is adopted, choose the NE that needs data upload
in the New Ne list box, and click the Ack button to enter the Upload
Detailed Info dialog box. If the Auto Ack is adopted, the Upload
Detailed Info dialog box will appear automatically.
6. If the Manual Ack is adopted, click the Next button to enter the Ack
Searched Link dialog box. If the Auto Ack is adopted, the Ack
Searched Link dialog box will appear automatically.
7. If the Manual Ack is adopted, select the normal link that needs
acknowledgement and then click the Ack button. If the Auto Ack is
adopted, the system will automatically acknowledge all the normal
links.
To specify an NE and search this NE and its corresponding optical
links:
1. In the client operation window, click the Device Config -> Search
SDH Ne and Link menu item to pop up the Search SDH Ne and
Link dialog box, as shown in Figure 99.
2. Choose the acknowledgement mode in the Ack drop-down list box to
be Manual Ack or Auto Ack.
3. Click the radio button of Search From Ne and make it to be . The
Search Content drop-down list box and the Search From Ne
searching box will be activated.
4. Choose the NEs to be searched in the Search From Ne searching box.
The selected NE will be checked with , as shown in Figure 101.

Chapter 5 - Common SDH Management Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 169
FI GURE 101 SEARCH SDH NE AND L I NK DI AL OG BOX ( SEARCH FROM NE)

5. Click the Search Content dialog box to choose the search content. The
options are: SDH Ne and Link, Only Link.
6. Click the Begin Search button. Perform the subsequent operations
according to step 4 through step 7 described in the task of To specify
the start IP address, and search all the NEs and optical links.
[Result]
If NEs and links satisfying the query condition are found, these NEs
and links will be updated and displayed in the EMS topology.
If nothing is found, the system will prompt error message.
Setting Port Mask to Find Link
[Purpose]
Shield the auto search function and connection function of the optical ports.
[Applicable NEs]
ZXMP S385, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S200, ZXMP
S325
[Steps]

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
170 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
1. In the client operation window, select NEs, click the Device Config ->
Set Port Mask of Find Link menu item to pop up the Set Port Mask
of Find Link dialog box.
2. Select NE, Board and Port to be configured in the drop-down list box.
3. Click the Add button. The corresponding information will be displayed
in the Mask Port Info box.
4. Click the Apply button to confirm the modification.
[Result]
Select the NEs that are set, execute NE auto search to find specific NEs.
Its will be displayed that no NEs are found. The specific NEs can be found
after deleting the mask port.
Setting Card Auto Search
[Purpose]
The EMS has no data related to the card but the card has been installed in
the NE. The card auto search function can automatically install the card in
the EMS and upload the card data.
This function is generally employed in commissioning.
[Prerequisite]
The NE is online and can communicate with EMS normally.
Neither the NCP database of NE nor the EMS database has data related
to the card.
The card has been powered on and is waiting for configuration.
[Applicable NEs]
ZXMP S385, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S200, ZXMP
S325
[Steps]
1. In the client operation window, double-click the NE to be installed with
the card to enter the Card Management dialog box.
2. In the Card Management dialog box, right-click the slot of the card to
pop up the shortcut menu.
3. Click the Board Auto Find menu item.
[Result]
If the command succeeded, the slot will be installed with corresponding
card in the EMS, and the card data is identical with that of the
corresponding card in the equipment hardware.
If the command failed, the EMS will pop up a prompt box, indicating
the failure reason.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 171
PART B
Running Operations

In this part, operations concerning fault management are provided for
users to check the running status of equipment, discover and solve
possible faults.
PART B includes the following three chapters:
Chapter 6 Alarm Management
This chapter describes the operations of alarm setting and alarm
query.
Chapter 7 Performance Management
This chapter describes the operations of performance setting and
performance query.
Chapter 8 Maintenance Management
This chapter introduces the basic maintenance operations.


ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
172 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
This page is intentionally blank.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 173
Ch a p t e r 6
Alarm Management

This chapter describes the operation methods and flows of alarm
configuration and alarm query in ZXONM E300.
Alarm Configuration
To locate alarms quickly or avoid interference caused by worthless alarms,
the location and parameters of alarms can be set during routine
maintenance, such as masking some alarms, or setting standby alarms.
Setting Alarm Mask
[Purpose]
Alarm mask is used to confirm whether to report the alarm to the EMS.
The NE will not report a masked alarm to the EMS.
Caution: The normal supervison on the network running status will be affected
because the card of NE will not report a masked alarm to the EMS.
Therefore, try to avoid the alarm mask operation during the network running, or
cancel the operation after maintenance.

[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
Take NE D in the networking example in Chapter 1 as an example.
[Steps]
To mask the input optical power out-of-limit alarm of NE D
OL16[1-1-1] card Port 1

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
174 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
1. Select NE D in the client operation window, and select the menu item
Alarm -> Alarm Config -> Alarm Mask menu to enter the Alarm
Mask dialog box.
2. Select OL16 [1-1-1] in the Detection Card drop-down list box.
3. Select STM16 optical physical interface in the Detection Point drop-
down list box.
4. Select 1#Port under OL16[1-1-1] in the Source Card list.
5. Select input optical power out of limit in the Alarm Reason drop-
down list box.
6. Click the Add button to add this alarm to Alarm Mask List.
7. Click the Apply button to mask the alarm.
FI GURE 102 AL ARM MASK DI AL OG BOX


[Result]
When the optical power out-of-limit alarm is generated on Port 1 of NE D
OL16[1-1-1] card, it will not be reported to the EMS.
Double click NE D in the client operation window, and the alarm mask
status indicator will be displayed on the OL16[1-1-1] card in the Card
Management dialog box.

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 175
Setting Alarm Severity
[Purpose]
The alarms in ZXONM E300 are divided into different levels depending on
the severity, including critical alarm, major alarm, minor alarm, and
warning alarm. Each alarm has a default severity level in the system.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
Take NE D in the networking case in Chapter 1 as an example.
Modify the severity of STM-16 optical interface LOS alarm from the default
level (critical alarm) to major alarm level:
[Steps]
8. Select NE D in the client operation window, and select the Alarm ->
Alarm Config -> Alarm Severity menu to enter the Alarm Severity
dialog box.
9. Click the icon before STM-16 optical physical interface to unfold the
alarms under this interface, as shown in Figure 103.
10. Click the Alarm Severity drop-down list box corresponding to LOS
under STM-16 optical physical interface, and modify it to Major.
11. Click the Apply button to confirm the modification.
FI GURE 103 AL ARM SEVERI TY DI AL OG BOX



ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
176 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
[Result]
When the STM-16 optical interface of NE D generates an LOS alarm, its
alarm level will be Major.
Setting Alarm Severity Template
[Purpose]
It is used to implement the configuration for alarm severity template.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
1. Select NE in the client operation window, and select the Alarm ->
Alarm Config -> Alarm Severity Template menu to enter the
Alarm Severity Template dialog box.
2. Click the New Template button to pop up the dialogue box. Enter the
name of alarm severity template.
3. Click OK button to save the new template. The new established
template is displayed in the Template List box.
4. Double-click the template in the Template List, the corresponding
detailed information about the template are illustrated in the Current
Template box.
5. Select the alarm reason, and configure the current alarm severity for
the template.
6. Click the Save Current button to confirm the modification.
[Result]
In the Alarm Severity dialogue box, click the Import button to pop up the
template list. New established template is displayed in the template list.
Setting Alarm Standby
[Purpose]
The alarm standby function is used to process the alarms generated on the
ports having no loaded network traffic.
The SDH NE supports two alarm standby modes: auto report and inversion.
Auto report: The alarm will not be reported to the ZXONM E300 until
the port is loaded with traffic, and then the normal alarm reporting
status is recovered automatically.
Inversion: The alarm status of the alarm source is inverse to the actual
alarm status. For example, if the port of electrical tributary board is set
as Inversion mode, then, R_LOS alarm will be generated after the
board carrying service.

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 177
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
Take NE E in the networking instance in Chapter 1 as an example.
Suppose no traffic have been loaded on the port 1 of ET1[1-1-2] card of
NE E.
[Steps]
1. Select NE E in the client operation window, and select the Alarm ->
Alarm Config -> Alarm Standby menu item to enter the Alarm
Standby dialog box.
2. Select ET1[1-1-2] in the Detection Card drop-down list box.
3. Select PDH 2M physical interface in the Detection Point drop-down
list box, as shown in Figure 104
4. Select 1#Port under ET1[1-1-2] in the Source Card List.
5. Select Inversion in the Alarm Standby Mode drop-down list box.
6. Click the Add button to add this alarm to Alarm Standby List.
7. Click the Apply button to confirm the configuration.
FI GURE 104 AL ARM STANDB Y DI AL OG BOX

[Result]
Disconnect the cable between ET1 card Port 2 and Port 1 of NE E while
the traffic has been loaded. Then query the current alarm of NE E, you
will find the EMS does not report the LOS alarm of the port.
Connect the cable between ET1 card Port 2 and Port 1 of NE E. Query
the current alarm of NE E while the traffic recovers. Then you will find
the EMS report the LOS alarm of the port.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
178 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Setting Alarm Audible
[Purpose]
Set sound of the SDH equipment if the alarm is happened.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
1. Select an SDH NE in the client operation window, and select the menu
item Alarm -> Alarm Config -> Alarm Audible to enter the Alarm
Audible Set dialog box.
2. Click the Audible drop-down button and select if the alarm sound is
audible for the SDH equipment, as shown in Figure 105. The options
are: Allow, Forbid, Reset.
3. Click the Apply button to confirm the operation.
FI GURE 105 AL ARM AUDI B L E SET DI AL OG BOX

[Result]
If Allow is selected, when the power cable is correctly connected, the
equipment will give alarm sound whenever there is an alarm in the
equipment.
If Forbid is selected, the equipment will not give alarm.
If Reset is selected, the equipment will stop the current alarm, and
will not give alarm sound until a new alarm occurs.
Setting Alarm Audio
[Purpose]

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 179
Users can select a preferred sound file provided by ZXONM E300 or a
customized sound file as the alarm prompt sound.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
1. In the client operation window, select the menu item System ->
System Config to enter the System Management dialog box.
2. Go to Alarm page and click the Sound Category drop-down list box
in Alarm Audio combo box, then select the alarm level or alarm
prompt.
3. Click the Sound drop-down list box, and select a sound file.
4. Input or adjust the sound duration in the Duration input box.
5. Click the Apply button to apply the configuration.

[Result]
The sounds of each alarm level and the alarm prompt at the EMS terminal
are consistent with the sound files configured.
Setting Alarm Color
[Purpose]
To set the color of alarms at different levels as required.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
1. In the client operation window, select the System -> System Config
menu item to enter the System Management dialog box.
2. Go to Alarm page and click an alarm level button in the Alarm Color
combo box to enter Alarm Color Chooser dialog box corresponding to
the alarm level. Then modify the alarm color of this alarm level.
3. Click the OK button in the Alarm Color Chooser dialog box. And then
click the Apply button in the System Management dialog box to
confirm the modification.
[Result]
The alarms of different levels will be shown in the color configured at the
EMS terminal.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
180 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Setting Alarm Prompt
[Purpose]
The EMS will prompt the user about the alarm when the prompt function
of this alarm is enabled.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
Take NE E in the networking instance in Chapter 1 as an example.
Suppose it is necessary to prompt the Loss Of STM-1 Optical Signal (LOS)
alarm for NE E.
[Steps]
1. Select NE E in the client operation window, and select the menu item
Alarm -> Alarm Config -> Alarm Prompt to enter the Alarm
prompt setting dialog box.
2. Select LOS in the Candidate Alarm list under STM1 branch, and click
to add the selected alarm to the Need Prompt Alarm list.
3. Click Apply to confirm the configuration, as shown in Figure 106.
FI GURE 106 AL ARM PROMPT SETTI NG DI AL OG BOX

Note: Click Apply button to make this alarm prompt be applicable to other
NEs, which can set the alarm prompt on NEs fastly.
[Result]
When NE E reports the LOS alarm, the EMS will automatically prompt the
user with a prompt dialog box of this alarm.

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 181
Setting Alarm Filter
[Purpose]
The alarms can be reported optionally based on the users requirements
through setting the alarm filter. It includes the settings of AlarmReport
Filter and AlarmShow Filter.
AlarmReport Filter: This setting is sent to the EMS server layer
(Manager). For the alarms set in the AlarmReport Filter mode, the
card will detect them and report them to the server, but none users
logging to this server can detect them.
AlarmShow Filter: For the alarms set in the AlarmShow Filter mode,
the card will detect them and report them to the manager, but the
alarms are displayed or not in the client operation window depending
on different users.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
Take the NE E in the networking instance in Chapter 1 as example.
Suppose it is necessary to filter the NCP card alarm for NE E.
[Steps]
To set AlarmReport Filter:
1. Select NE E in the client operation window, and select the menu item
Alarm -> Alarm Config -> Alarm Filter to enter the Alarm filter
setting dialog box.
2. In the AlarmReport Filter page of the dialog box, select NCP[1-1-9]
under E in the Optional condition list, and click to add it to the
filter condition list.
3. Click Apply to confirm the configuration, as shown in Figure 107.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
182 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 107 AL ARM FI L TER SETTI NG DI AL OG BOX ( AL ARMREPORT FI L TER PAGE)

To set AlarmShow Filter:
1. Select NE E in the client operation window, and select the Alarm ->
Alarm Config -> Alarm Filter menu item.
2. Click the AlarmShow Filter tab in the dialog box to enter the
AlarmShow Filter page.
3. Select NCP[1-1-9] under E in the Optional condition list, and click
to add the NCP card to the filter condition list.
4. Click Apply to confirm the configuration.
[Result]
With the AlarmReport Filter set, no users logging in this server will
detect the NCP card alarm of NE E.
With the AlarmShow Filter set, and the current login user will not
detect the NCP card alarm of NE E in the client operation window, but
the alarm can be detected through the alarm query function.
Setting Agent External Alarm
[Purpose]
The quantity of external alarms varies with equipment. Each monitoring
input can be connected with different external alarm detectors, and can
report alarms from each detector. The alarm definition and electrical level
can be set in the EMS.
[Applicable NEs]

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 183
ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S325, ZXMP S320, ZXMP
S360, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S200.
The following example uses the smoke alarm to describe how to change
the setting of Agent external alarm.
The smoke alarm is set as a low electrical level alarm (by default) in the
system.
[Steps]
1. Select SDH NE in the client operation window, and select the menu
item Alarm -> Alarm Config -> Agent External Alarm to enter the
Agent External Alarm Setting dialog box.
2. Click the drop-down button of the Alarm Mode list, and modify the
alarm level of this alarm mode, as shown in Figure 108.
3. Click Apply to confirm the modification.
FI GURE 108 AGENT EXTERNAL AL ARM SETTI NG DI AL OG BOX

[Result]
If the equipment hardware cables are properly connected, then the
corresponding alarm information will be shown on the EMS when the alarm
is generated.
Setting Alarm Auto Acknowledgement
Time
[Purpose]
The alarm auto acknowledgement time ranges from one day to three days.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
184 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
1. In the client operation window, click the System -> System Config
menu item to enter the System Management dialog box.
2. Click the Alarm Time tab to enter the Alarm Time page.
3. Input the auto acknowledgement time.
4. Click the Apply button to apply the configuration.
[Result]
If the user does not acknowledge the alarm within the configured time,
then the system will acknowledge it automatically.
Setting Alarm Diagnose Rule
[Purpose]
The reason of alarms and possible solution are provided in the alarm
diagnose rule. Users can also add, modify or delete the reason, diagnosis
method or solutions according to actual situations.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
To query the alarm diagnose rule:
1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and then select the menu
item Alarm -> Alarm Config -> Alarm Diagnose Rule Setting to
pop up the Alarm Diagnose Config dialog box, as shown in Figure
109.

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 185
FI GURE 109 AL ARM DI AGNOSE CONFI G DI AL OG BOX

2. Double click the alarm to be queried in the list box at the left of the
dialog box according to the NE type and detection point.
To add, modify or delete the reason, diagnosis method or solution
in the diagnosis rule:
1. Click the alarm to be modified in the list box at the left of the Alarm
Diagnose Config dialog box.
2. Click the Add button to pop up the Alarm Diagnose Information
Setting dialog box.
3. Input the reason, diagnose method and handle method, and then click
the button OK.
4. Or select an original diagnosis rule, and click the Update button to pop
up the Alarm Diagnose Information Setting dialog box. And then
modify the information in it.
5. Or select a diagnosis rule, and click the Delete button to delete it.
6. After all operations, click the button Apply to confirm and save the
operations.
Setting Email or Short Message Output of
Alarm
[Purpose]
Take the alarm card, alarm severity, and alarm type as the alarm outputs.
When the EMS detects an alarm that meets the conditions, it will notify the
operator via email or short message.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
186 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
[Prerequisite]
There should be an environment variable named AlarmOutput. By
default, this variable does not exist and the Alarm Output menu item
is not displayed in the EMS.
In the email mode, the EMS computer must communicate normally
with the SMTP server.
In the short message mode, the serial port of the EMS computer must
be connected with a module to send the short message.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item
Alarm -> Alarm Config -> Alarm Output to pop up the Alarm
Output dialog box.
2. Click the New button to pop up the Alarm Output Filter dialog box.
Create an alarm output task, and select the NE, card, alarm reason,
time and prompt mode (email or short message).
3. According to the notification mode, perform the following
communication configurations.
In the email mode, click the Comm Set button in the Alarm
Output dialog box, and set the STMP server in the Alarm Output
Communication Set dialog box.
In the short message mode, click the Comm Set button in the
Alarm Output dialog box, and set the serial port number and short
message center number in the Alarm Output Communication
Set dialog box.
4. Click Apply to confirm the configuration.

[Result]
After setting the alarm output mode and condition, the system will notify
the user via email or a short message if the relevant alarm is generated.
Detecting Free AU
[Purpose]
When there is the protection path in the transmission network, Free AU
detection can priorly detect whether the protection path is normal or not.
Under the SNCI mode, AU-AIS is sent to free AU path by default. For
example, NE A is docking with NEB and the free path of NEA sends AU-AIS,
if NEB sets the function of detecting free AU, then NE B would detect the
AU-AIS and report to EMS as well.
The alarm of AU path does not be detected by default.

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 187
[Applicable NEs]
The applicable NEs are ZXMP S330, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S385,
ZXMP S200 and ZXMP S325.
[Steps]
1. In the client operation window, select an NE and click the menu item
Alarm -> Alarm Config -> Free AU Detecting Alarm Setting to go to
Free AU Detecting Alarm Setting dialog box.
2. Select board from Board list box.
3. In UnDetecting list box, click the port of free AU path to be detected,
and then click button to add the selected port to the Detecting list
box; on the other side, click the port in Detecting list box, and then click
button to return the selected port to the UnDetecting list box.
4. Click Apply button to send the command.
[Result]
If the protection path is normally, the AU_AIS alarm can be detected then.
Setting Alarm Parameter
[Purpose]
Configure the alarm parameters for each board, such as UAS filter, alarm
clear affair time, alarm raise affair time and insert AIS payload into TIM
alarm.
The alarm of AU path is not detected by default.
[Applicable NEs]
The applicable NEs are ZXMP S330, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S385,
ZXMP S200 and ZXMP S325.
[Steps]
Take the modification of alarm raise affair time and alarm clear affair time
for example to illustrate the configuration for the alarm parameter.
1. In the client operation window, select an NE and click the menu item
Alarm -> Alarm Config -> Alarm Parameter to go to Alarm
Parameter dialog box.
2. Select the board to be configured in the drop-down list.
3. Select the check box. indicates the drop-down list is activated.
4. Configure the Alarm Raise Affair Time as 3, and configure Alarm
Clear Affair Time as 5.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
188 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
5. Click the Apply button to confirm the modification.
[Result]
Open the Board Management dialogue box. Pull out the fiber of
corresponding board for 3 seconds. The alarm will be reported. Insert the
fiber again. The alarm will be disappeared after 5 seconds.
Alarm Query
This section introduces the operations of querying current alarms, history
alarms, protection switching event, over-threshold alarms and circuit-
related alarms.
Querying Current Alarms
[Purpose]
To query current alarms; acknowledge, clear, or print the alarm
information.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
The following four methods can be used to query the current alarms.
Querying through the Current Alarm sub-page
Select the refresh radio button on the lower left to turn it into . The
current alarms and the over threshold alarms in the network will be
shown in real time in the Current Alarm sub-page of the client
operation window, as shown in Figure 110.

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 189
FI GURE 110 CL I ENT OPERATI ON WI NDOW ( CURRENT AL ARM SUB - PAGE)

Querying current alarms through the alarm buttons on the status
board
i. Click the alarm button ( ) to display the menu items of
the unacknowledged critical alarms and total alarms, as shown in
Figure 111.
FI GURE 111 QUERYI NG AL ARMS THROUGH STATUS BOARD ( 1)

ii. Select a menu item, and the Current Alarm Management dialog
box will pop up. Take Figure 111 as an example, select Total
Critical Alarms: 63, the dialog box pops up as shown in Figure
112.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
190 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 112 QUERYI NG AL ARMS THROUGH STATUS BOARD ( 2)

iii. Click the Condition button in the dialog box to filter the alarm
information in the pop-up dialog box.
iv. Click the AckAll or Ack button in the dialog box to confirm all
alarms or the selected alarms.
v. Click the button to print the alarm messages while the report
server is running.
vi. Right-click an alarm message to display the short-cut menu,
including the menu items Alarm Mask, Alarm Standby, Alarm
Filter, Affected Path and Anchor NE.
Querying the alarms through the alarm statistic function
i. Select an NE in the client operation window, select Alarm ->
Alarm Statistic in the menu to display the Alarm Statistic dialog
box, where all acknowledged alarms, unacknowledged alarms,
locked alarms and acknowledged history alarm in the entire
network will be shown in a list.
ii. Click the icon in front of the option (All Nes or an individual
alarm NE) in the Resource column, and the critical, major, minor
and warning alarms will be displayed, as shown in Figure 113.

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 191
FI GURE 113 AL ARM STATI STI C DI AL OG BOX

iii. Click in the Browse column to display the menu items.
Select a menu item, the dialog box as shown in Figure 112 will pop
up, where you can query detailed alarm information of the selected
alarm severity.
Querying the alarms of a single NE through the current alarm
management function
i. Select an NE in the client operation window, select the menu item
Alarm -> Current Alarm to enter the AllAlarm page in the
Current Alarm Management dialog box, where all alarms of the
selected NE will be displayed in real time, as shown in Figure 114.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
192 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 114 CURRENT AL A RM MANAGEMENT DI AL OG BOX ( AL L AL ARM PAGE)

ii. Click the Condition button to filter the alarm information in the
pop-up dialog box.
iii. Click the AckAll or Ack button in the dialog box to confirm all
alarms or the selected alarms.
iv. Click the button to print the alarm messages while the report
server is running.
v. Right-click an alarm message to display the short-cut menu,
including Alarm Mask, Alarm Standby, Alarm Filter, Affected
Path and Anchor NE.

Tip: You can also pop up the Current Alarm Management dialog box by the
following method:
Right-click an NE icon in the client operation window, or right-click the card in
the Card Management dialog box to display the short-cut menu.
Select Current Alarm in the menu to pop up the Current Alarm
Management dialog box.
[Result]
User can query the current alarm at the EMS side, and perform the
operations on the alarms by button and shortcut menu in the dialog box.

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 193
Querying History Alarms
[Purpose]
To query history alarms; acknowledge, clear, or print the alarm
information.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
The following two methods can be used to query the history alarms.
Querying history alarms through the history alarm statistic function
i. Select an NE in the client operation window, select the menu item
Alarm -> History Alarm Statistic to enter the Condition page in
the History Alarm Statistic page;
ii. Set the query conditions in the Condition page, such as the alarm
severity, alarm type, detection point, alarm reason, alarm time,
alarm NE, and alarm card.
You can also query the alarms through filtering. The query
conditions are user-defined.
iii. Click the Query button and enter the Result page of the History
Alarm Statistic dialog box, where the history alarm statistics
meeting the query conditions is displayed.
The statistics can be displayed in the form of graph or table. Figure
115 shows an example of table.
FI GURE 115 HI STORY AL A RM STATI STI C DI AL OG BOX


ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
194 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Querying history alarms of a single NE through the history alarm
management function
i. Select an NE in the client operation window, select the menu item
Alarms -> History Alarm to enter the Alarm Management
dialog box.
ii. Click the Query button, and all history alarms from 0:0:0 of the
day to the current moment will be displayed by default, as shown in
Figure 116.
FI GURE 116 HI STORY AL A RM DI AL OG BOX

Query history alarms based on specified conditions:
Click the button above the resource list box at the left of the
Alarm Management dialog box, all NEs and corresponding cards
will be listed in the resource box.
Select the NE or cards to be queried, and then click the button
to add the query conditions.
In the History Alarm area, set the querying conditions, such as
time, severity level, acknowledgement status, detection point,
alarming reason and begin time.
Then click the Query button to query the history alarms meeting
the set conditions.
Click Ack to acknowledge the selected alarms.
Click Delete to delete the selected alarms.
Right-click an alarm message to display the short-cut menu,
including Alarm Mask, Alarm Standby, Alarm Filter, Affected
Path and Anchor NE.
Click to print the alarm while the report server is running.

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 195
[Result]
User can query the history alarm at the EMS side, and perform the
operations on the alarms by button and shortcut menu in the dialog box.
Querying Locked Alarms
[Purpose]
The locked alarms refer to the history alarms unacknowledged.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
The following two methods can be used to query locked alarms:
Query locked alarms through the alarm statistic function.
i. Select an NE in the client operation window, select Alarm ->
Alarm Statistic in the menu to enter the Alarm Statistic dialog
box. The number of All NEs and the number of locked alarms of the
selected NEs are listed in the Alarm Statistic dialog box.
ii. Click the Condition button to pop up the Alarm Statistic Filter
dialog box.
iii. Select the Display Locked Alarm check box and click the Apply
button.
iv. Click Close to return to the Alarm Statistic dialog box, and the
Locked Alarm column will be added into the list, as shown in
Figure 117.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
196 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 117 AL ARM STATI STI C DI AL OG BOX ( L OCK ED AL ARM)


Expand All Nes or select a specific NE, and click of the
Browse column.
Click Lock Alarm in the browse menu to display the Alarm
Management dialog box, where the locked alarms of the severity
level will be displayed.
Querying locked alarms through the short-cut menu of the NE
Right click an NE in the navigation tree or the topology in the client
operation window, and select the menu item Lock Alarm
Management in the pop-up shortcut menu to display the Alarm
Management dialog box, where the unacknowledged history alarms of
the NE will be displayed.
[Result]
The locked alarm can be queried in the dialog box then.
Querying Protection Switching Events
[Purpose]
The protection switching events include the MSP switching event, SNCP
switching event, card switching event, RPR switching event, ATM switching
event, clock source switching event and LSP switching event of the SDH
NE.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
To query current protection switching events:

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 197
1. Select an SDH NE in the client operation window, and select the menu
item Alarm -> Current Protection Switch Event to pop up the
Current Protection Switch Event dialog box; Select the type of the
protection switching event, and click Query to query the current
protection switching events of the NE.
2. Click the Event tab in the client operation window to enter the Event
sub-page, all the current protection switching events in the network
will be displayed. The displayed information covers the event status
(arise or disappear), NE name, information of the protected card,
switching type, event type, switching status and time. You can also
refresh or clear the events.
To query history protection switching events:
1. Select an SDH NE in the client operation window, and select the menu
item Alarm -> History Protection Switch Event to pop up the
History Protection Switch Event dialog box;
2. Select the type of the protection switching event and the time range to
be queried;
3. Click the button Query to query the history protection switching
events of the NE.
[Result]
The current PSE or history PSE can be queried then.
Querying Over Threshold Alarms
[Purpose]
When the performance value exceeds the set threshold, the NE will report
an over threshold alarm.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
To query current over threshold alarms
There are four methods to query current over threshold alarms as
follows.
Select an SDH NE in the client operation window, and select the menu
item Alarm -> Current Over Threshold Alarm to enter the Current
Over Threshold Alarm dialog box; Set alarm severity level,
acknowledge information, detecting point and alarm reason, etc., then
click Query to query the current over threshold alarms of the NE.
Right-click an SDH NE in the client operation window, and select
Current Over Threshold Alarm in the pop-up short-cut menu to
display the Current Over Threshold Alarm dialog box; Then click
Query to query the current over threshold alarms of the NE.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
198 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
In the Alarm sub-page (as shown in Figure 110) in the client operation
window, all the current over threshold alarms of the network will be
displayed with the refresh radio button selected.
On the status board (as shown in Figure 110) in the client operation
window, the blinking of the button indicates there is a new over
threshold alarm being reported.
Click the button, and then query the detailed alarm message in
the pop-up NE Selection dialog box.
To query history over threshold alarms
1. Select an SDH NE in the client operation window, select the menu item
Alarm -> History Over Threshold Alarm to enter the History Over
Threshold Alarm dialog box;
2. Set alarm severity level, acknowledge information, detecting point and
alarm reason, etc., and then click Query to query the history over
threshold alarms of the NE.

Note: For query on condictions
In the Current Over Threshold Alarm or the History Over Threshold Alarm
dialog box, the query conditions can be set as those in the Current Alarm or
History Alarm dialog box.
[Result]
The current over threshold alarm or history over threshold alarm can be
queried.
Analyzing Circuit Alarm Correlation
[Purpose]
The correlation between circuit alarms of an NE can be queried and
analyzed.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
To query and analyze the correlation of all circuit alarms for an NE
1. Select an SDH NE in the client operation window, and select the menu
item Alarm -> Alarm Analysis to pop up the Analysis config dialog
box.
2. Click the Next to enter the Result dialog box after analyzing.
To analyze the related alarms of an alarm

Chapter 6 - Alarm Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 199
1. In client operation window, select an SDH NE and click Alarm->
Current Alarm menu item to pop up Current Alarm Management
dialog box.
2. Select an alarm message in the Current Alarm Management dialog
box, and click the Analysis button to analyze the selected alarm.
[Result]
The result dialog box pops up to display the detailed information of the
correlative alarms and the non-correlative alarms, as shown in Figure 118.
FI GURE 118 RESUL T DI AL OG BOX ( CI RCUI T AL ARM ANAL YSI S)



ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
200 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
This page is intentionally blank.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 201
Ch a p t e r 7
Performance Management

This chapter describes the operation method and process for performance
configuration and performance query in ZXONM E300.
Performance Configuration
Setting Digital Performance Threshold
[Purpose]
Digital performance refers to parameters that reflect the transmission and
traffic quality, such as channels and interfaces. In the operation of the
equipment, the digital performance is detected by the MCU of cards, which
also performs statistics on the performance values. The performance
statistical period can be 15 minutes or 24 hours.
In ZXONM E300, each performance threshold has a default value, which is
downloaded to the NCP card of the NE while the system downloads the
database at the first time.
The 15 minutes or 24 hours performance threshold of the performance
items can be modified and then downloaded to the NCP with some special
commands.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
Take NE D in the networking instance in Chapter 1 as an example.
[Steps]
1. Select NE D in the client operation window, and then select the menu
item Performance -> Performance Config -> Parameter
Performance Threshold to pop up the Digital Threshold dialog box.
2. Select the detection cycle to 15 Minutes.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
202 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
3. Click the icon before the detection point RS.
4. Set the high threshold of UAS to 900 in the list box, as shown in
Figure 119.
5. Click the Apply button to confirm the configuration.
FI GURE 119 PERFORMANCE THRESHOL D DI AL OG BOX


[Result]
When the MCU of NE D detects the 15 minutes performance value of UAS
is greater than or equals to 1000, the NE D will report the UAS over
threshold alarm.
Setting Analog Performance Threshold
[Purpose]
The analog performance refers to parameters that embody the working
conditions of physical components or circuits, such as the receiving and
transmitting optical power of a laser. Generally, there is an higher
threshold and a lower threshold for each analog parameter.
As the quantity of analog parameters can not be accumulated during a
period, the difference between the analog value and reference value is
taken as the criterion to judge whether it is normal.
The thresholds of analog performance items of a specific card can be
modified through the analog performance threshold command.
[Applicable NEs]
ZXMP S330, ZXMP S325, ZXMP S360, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP
S385, and ZXMP S200 NEs that are online and can communicate with the
EMS normally

Chapter 7 - Performance Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 203
Take NE D in the networking instance in Chapter 1 as an example. To
modify the lower threshold for the input optical power of port 1 on
OL16[1-1-1] card to 35 dBm.
[Steps]
1. Select NE D in the client operation window, and then select the menu
item Performance -> Performance Config -> Analog
Performance Threshold to pop up the Analog Performance
Threshold dialog box.
2. Select OL16[1-1-1] in the card list.
3. Click Default to display all analog performance items of OL16[1-1-1]
in the dialog box.
4. Set the lower threshold of input optical power of Port 1 to -35.
5. Click the Apply button to confirm the configuration.
[Result]
The OL16[1-1-1] card will report the input power over threshold alarm
when the input optical power on port 1 is lower than -35 dBm.
Resetting Performance Register
[Purpose]
The NCP card of an NE will clear the local performance register after
receiving the reset command delivered by the manager, and the
performance statistics will be relaunched.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs that are online and can communicate with the EMS
normally
Take NE D in the networking instance in Chapter 1 as an example. To clear
the 15-minute performance value for the RS signal deterioration
performance item on port 1 of OL16[1-1-1].
[Result]
1. Select NE D in the client operation window, and then select the menu
item Performance -> Performance Config -> Performance
Register Reset to pop up the Performance Register Reset dialog
box.
2. Select OL16[1-1-1] in the Detection Card drop-down list box;
3. Select RS in the Detection Point drop-down list box, and this card is
added in the Source Card list box;
4. Select signal deteriorated(SD) in the Performance item drop-down
list box;
5. Select 1# Port in the Source Card list box;

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
204 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
6. Select 15 Minutes as the granularity cycle;
7. Click Add to add the selected performance item to the performance
register reset list.
8. Click Apply to confirm the configuration, as shown in Figure 120.
FI GURE 120 PERFORMANCE REGI STER RESET DI AL OG BOX


[Result]
In the Performance Management dialog box, query the 15 minutes
performance of the RS signal deterioration item on port 1 of NE D OL16[1-
1-1]. The register for the performance value should be recounted.
Restraining Zero Performance
[Purpose]
Set whether to report the history performance item whose quantity is 0.
Be default, the item of zero performance is not reported. This operation is
only applicable to online SDH NEs that are in normal communications with
the EMS.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs that are online and can communicate with the EMS
normally
Take NE D in the networking instance in Chapter 1 as an example. To clear
the zero-performance restrain status of OL16[1-1-1] and enable the
reporting of the zero-performance item.

Chapter 7 - Performance Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 205
[Steps]
1. Select NE D in the client operation window, and then select the menu
item Performance -> Performance Config -> Zero Performance
Restrain to pop up the Zero-Performance Restrain dialog box.
2. Unselect Restrain of the OL16 [1-1-1] in the History 15M Zero-Pfm
column.
3. Click Apply to confirm the configuration as shown in Figure 121
FI GURE 121 ZERO- PERFORMANCE RESTRAI N DI AL OG BOX


[Result]
Query the history 15-minute performance of NE D OL16[1-1-1] in the
History Performance page in the Performance Management dialog
box. The zero-performance should be shown in the list.
Masking Performance
[Purpose]
If a performance item is masked, it will not be reported to the EMS. The
masking command is sent to corresponding card of the NE. The default
status of each performance is unmasked.
Caution: The card does not report any masked performance item to the
EMS and this will influence normal supervision of network operation. Therefore,
performance mask in network operation should be avoided or this operation should
be canceled in time once the operation goal is achieved.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
206 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Take NE D in the networking instance in Chapter 1 as an example. To
mask all performance on port 1 of OL16[1-1-1].
[Steps]
1. Select NE D in the client operation window, and then select the menu
item Performance -> Performance Config -> Performance Mask
to pop up the Performance Mask dialog box.
2. Select OL16[1-1-1] in the Detection Card drop-down list box;
3. Select RS in the Detection Point drop-down list box, and the card is
added into the Source Card list box;
4. Select Select all in the Performance item drop-down list box;
5. Select 1# Port in the Source Card list box;
6. Select the performance type as Digital Performance, and then click
Add to add all performance to the performance mask list.
7. Click Apply to confirm the configuration as shown in Figure 122.
FI GURE 122 PERFORMANCE MASK DI AL OG BOX


[Result]
NE D does not report the RS performance of port 1 of OL16[1-1-1] card to
the EMS. Double-click NE D in the client operation window. In the Card
Management dialog box, the OL16[1-1-1] card is indicated with the
performance mask identifier .
Setting Performance Collection Time
[Purpose]
Set the collection interval of 15-minute performance or the starting time of
24-hour performance collection for the SDH NEs.

Chapter 7 - Performance Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 207
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
To set the 15-minute performance collection interval
1. In the client operation window, click the menu item System ->
System Config to enter the System Management dialog box.
2. Click the Performance Time tab to enter the Performance Time
page.
3. Input the performance collection interval.
4. Click the Apply button to apply the configuration.
To set the 24-hour performance collection starting time
1. Select an SDH NE in the client operation window, and then select the
menu item Performance -> Performance Config -> NE 24 Hours
History Performance Collection Time to pop up the NE 24-Hour
Performance Collection Time dialog box.
2. Enter the start time in the Set collection start time text box (with
the time precision as second, the default collection time is 00:00:00).
3. Click the Apply button to confirm the configuration.
[Result]
For the 15-minute performance collection time, the manager should
collect the history 15-minute performance of all NEs at the set time.
For the 24-hour performance collection time, the manager should
collect the 24-hour performance of the NE at the set time.
Setting SNC Switching
[Purpose]
In the higher order path protection ring, the protection switching can be
performed based on switching conditions after setting the subnet
connection (SNC) switching conditions. It is only applicable to ZXMP S380,
ZXMP S390, ZXMP S330, and ZXMP S385.
Note: For other SDH NEs, the SNC switching conditions can not be set. The
SNC (I) is the default switching condition for them.

The SNC switching conditions include:
SNC (I) (SNC protection with inherent supervision)

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
208 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
If the receiving end detects the Service layer Signal Failure (SSF)
alarm, the traffic will be forced to switch. The SSF alarm is caused by
Loss of Pointer (LOP) and the Alarm Indication Signal (AIS).
SNC (I) is the default switching condition of SNC.
Signal Deterioration (SD)
If an SD alarm is detected on the channel, a forced switching will occur.
By default, the SD will not lead to channel switching.
SNC (N) (SNC protection with non-intrusive supervision)
If the receiving end detects a Track Signal Failure (TSF) or Track Signal
Deterioration (TSD) alarm, a forced switching will occur. The TSF is
caused by the SSF, UNEQ or TIM alarm, and the TSD is caused by the
SD alarm.
By default, the UNEQ, TIM and SD alarm will not cause path switching.
[Applicable NEs]
ZXMP S330, ZXMP S325, ZXMP S360, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP
S385, ZXMP S200.
Other SDH NEs take SNC (I) as the switching condition and the SNC
Switch Config menu item is not applicable to them.
[Steps]
1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and then select the menu
item Performance -> Performance Config -> SNC Switch Config
to pop up the SNC Switch Config dialog box.
2. Select the cross-connect card, electrical interface card or Ethernet card
in the card drop-down list box according to the channel type of the
switching ring.
To set the AU channel, select a cross-connect card.
To set the TU channel, select corresponding electric interface card
or Ethernet card.
3. Select the AU channel or the electrical interface in the Default list for
the switching configuration.
4. Click SD>> to add the selected items to the Configed list. The
switching condition for the selected channel or port is SNC (I)+SD.
5. Click SNC(N)>> to add the selected items to the Configed list. The
switching condition for the selected channel or port is SNC (N).
6. Click Apply to confirm the configuration. The switching condition for
ports 1 - 3 on the ET1 is SNC (I) and SD, as shown in Figure 123.

Chapter 7 - Performance Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 209
FI GURE 123 SNC SWI TCH CONFI G DI AL OG BOX


[Result]
Take Figure 123 as example. When ports 1 - 3 on the ET1[1-1-1] card of
the NE ZXMP_S330 detect an SD, LOP or AIS alarm, the switching will
occur.
Setting Data Flow Supervision Parameter
[Purpose]
The data flow of a VLAN can be supervised and queried separately while
querying current performances after setting the VLAN ID. This function is
applicable to ZXMP S330, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S380 and ZXMP S390
configured with RSEB card while they are online and in normal
communication with the EMS.
In the Current Performance page of the Performance Management
dialog box, you can query the add bytes to ringlet 0, add bytes to ringlet 1,
drop bytes to ringlet 0, drop bytes to ringlet 1, transit bytes to ringlet 0,
transit bytes to ringlet 1 of corresponding data flow of the specified VLAN.
The granularity cycle can be the 24-Hour Perf, current 15-Min Perf, history
15-Min Perf.
[Applicable NEs]
Online ZXMP S330, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390 NEs equipped
with RSEB card which is communicating with the EMS normally
[Steps]
1. Select an applicable NE in the client operation window.
2. Select the menu item Performance -> Performance Config -> Rpr
Board Traff AdminPara Setting to pop up corresponding dialog box.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
210 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
3. Select the RSEB card in the Board drop-down list box, and input the
start ID and end ID to be supervised in VLAN Start ID and VLAN End
ID.
4. Click the Add button, and then click the Apply to confirm the
configuration, as shown in Figure 124.
FI GURE 124 RPR BOARD TRAFF ADMI NPARA SETTI NG DI AL OG BOX


[Result]
After configuration, the performances of this VLAN ID can be queried in
the Current Performance page of the Performance Management
dialog box.
Performance Query
Querying Current Performance
[Purpose]
The current performance of SDH NEs includes current 15-minute/24-hour
performance (analog and digital), current 15-minute/24-hour analog
performance, and current 15-minute/24-hour digital performance.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]

Chapter 7 - Performance Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 211
1. Select an SDH NE in the client operation window, and then select the
menu item Performance -> Current Performance to pop up the
Performance Management dialog box, as shown in Figure 125.
FI GURE 125 PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT DI AL OG BOX ( WI TH QUERY RESUL T)


2. Click the Query button to query the current 15-minute performances
of all cards in the NE by default.
3. Or query current performances meeting specified conditions:
i. Click the button on top of the Resource list box, and then all
NEs and corresponding cards are listed in the box;
ii. Select the NE or cards to be queried, and lick the button to add
corresponding query conditions;
iii. Set the granularity cycle, detection points and items;
iv. In the Policy drop-down list box, select the predefined file of query
conditions. Clicking the Snapshot button can set query conditions;
4. Click the Query button to display the performance messages meeting
the query conditions. When the report server is running, click the
button to print the performance messages.
[Result]
The current performance can be queried according to the querying
conditions when the NE is online and the communication is normal
between the NE and EMS.
Querying History Performance
[Purpose]

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
212 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The query types of history performance are described in Table 79.
TAB L E 79 QUERY TYPES OF SDH NES
Parameters Descriptions
Granularity Cycle Two options: 15 minutes or 24 hours
Performance Type
Three options: Performance (including both digital performance
and analog performance), Digital Performance, Analog
Performance.
EMS database: Query the history performance messages that meet
the query conditions in the current EMS database. It is the default
data source. The NCP database uploads its data to the EMS
database periodically. It requires that the NE must be online.
NCP history data: First upload the NCP data to the EMS database.
Then query the history performance messages that meet the query
conditions. It requires that the NE must be online.
Data Source
Backup information: Query the history performance messages in
the backup file saved locally. The NE can be offline.

[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
1. Select an SDH NE in the client operation window, and then select the
menu item Performance -> History Performance to pop up the
Performance Management dialog box.
2. In the History Performance page, click the Apply button to query
the history 15-minute performances of all cards in the NE from the
time 0:0:0 of the day to current time by default.

Tip: You can also access the History Performance page by clicking the
History Performance tab in the Performance Management dialog box.

3. Or query current performances meeting specified conditions:
i. Click the button above the Resource list box, and then all NEs
and corresponding cards are listed in the box;
ii. Select the NE or cards to be queried, and lick the button to add
corresponding query conditions;
iii. Set the granularity cycle, time period, detection points and items;
iv. In the Policy drop-down list box, select the predefined file of query
conditions;

Chapter 7 - Performance Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 213
v. Check the Query NCP History Data check box to query the
history data saved on NCP card;
vi. Select Show beyond Benchmark Perf to filter the history
performances in the current page, that is, only the history data
which is beyond the benchmark performance is displayed in red.
vii. Click the BackInfo tab. Check the Include Backup Information
check box to activate the BackInfo combo box. Select the location
of the backup file.
4. Click the Query button to display the performance messages meeting
the query conditions. When the report server is running, click the
button to print the performance messages.
Setting Performance Statistics
[Purpose]
The performance statistic of SDH NEs includes history 15-minute
performance, history 24-hour performance and history 15-minute analog
performance.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
1. Statistic the performance based on query condition
i. Select an NE in the client operation window, and then select the
menu item Performance -> Performance Statistics to pop up
the Performance Statistics dialog box.
ii. Set the begin time and end time of performance statistics in the
Begin Time and End Time text box respectively.
iii. Click the Condition button to enter the Condition dialog box, and
set the detection card, detection point, performance item, source
card and performance cycle in it.
iv. Click Apply and Close button to return to the Performance
Statistics dialog box, and then the statistic result is displayed in
the form of list.
v. Click Query button, then the query result will be displayed in the
Performance Statistic dialog box.
vi. Click the Graph button to enter the Performance Graph dialog
box, and the result will be shown in the form of graph.
2. Statistic performance based on backup file
i. Select an NE in the client operation window, and then select the
menu item Performance -> Performance Statistics to pop up
the Performance Statistics dialog box.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
214 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
ii. Set the begin time and end time of performance statistics in the
Begin Time and End Time text box respectively.
iii. Select Query Backup File check box to activate BackInfo button.
iv. Click BackInfo button to pop up BackInfo dialog box. If the
backup file is saved in the default directory, the inputting box
displays the default file directory; if the backup file is saved in the
customized directory, click Check Default Director radio button to
cancel the default directory and then input the backup file directory.
v. Click Ok button in BackInfo dialog box to return to Performance
Statistic dialog box.
vi. Click Query button, then the query result will be displayed in the
Performance Statistic dialog box.
vii. Click the Graph button to enter the Performance Graph dialog
box, and the result will be shown in the form of graph.
[Result]
ZXONM E300 supports various performance graphs, for instance, fold-line
graph, polygonal graph, trapezoid graph, 3-D histogram, 2-D histogram
and scattered point graph.
Setting Performance Prediction
[Purpose]
Predict the 24-hour performance at some time in future according to the
current performance data. The predict time is 7 days at most.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and then select the menu
item Performance -> Performance Warning to pop up the
Performance Warning dialog box.
2. Set the beginning date of the history data, prediction days, detection
card, detection card, performance type, and source card.
3. Click the Add button to add the prediction condition to the
performance prediction list.
4. Click the Apply button.
[Result]
After prediction, the Performance warning result dialog box will pop up
to display the prediction result.


Chapter 7 - Performance Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 215
Setting Performance Task Management
[Purpose]
Create a task to specify conditions, so that the EMS can make statistics on
performance at the background according to the requirements in the
performance task. The performance statistics can be displayed in the form
of list or graph.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
Take NE D in the networking instance in Chapter 1 as an example. To get
the statistics of RS 15-minute performance on port 1 of OL16[1-1-1] card
with the time ranging 2005-7-02 to 2005-7-06.
[Steps]
1. Select NE D in the client operation window, and then select the menu
item Performance -> Performance Task to pop up the
Performance Task dialog box.
2. Click New to enter the New Task dialog box.
3. Set the parameters for the performance task in accordance with those
in Table 80.
TAB L E 80 PERFORMANCE TASK PARAMETER SETTI NG
Parameter Setting
Name test
Granularity cycle 15 minutes
From (start time of the performance
statistics)
2005, 7, 2, 15, 00, 00
To (end time of the performance statistics) 2005, 7, 6, 15, 00, 00
Detection card OL16[1-1-1]
Detection point RS
Performance type Select all
Source card 1#Port

4. Click Add to add the selected performance item to the performance
task list.
5. Click Apply in the New Task box to save the configuration and return
to the Performance Task dialog box, as shown in Figure 126.
6. Click the Apply button in the Performance Task dialog box.
Then the update column is null, indicating the task is running at the
background. When End is displayed in the Status column, the task is
completed.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
216 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 126 PERFORMANCE TASK DI AL OG BOX

[Result]
In the Performance Task dialog box as shown in Figure 126, select the
task test, and then click the Statistic button to display the task statistic
in the form of list in the dialog box as shown in Figure 127.
Click Graph to display the Performance Graph dialog box, where the
statistics is shown in the form of graph.
FI GURE 127 TASK STATI STI C RESUL T DI AL OG BOX



Chapter 7 - Performance Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 217
State Management
Querying Card Running State
[Purpose]
VCG of data board can be queried at real time.
[Applicable NE]
ZXMP S200, ZXMP S325, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S380 and ZXMP
S390
[Steps]
1. In the client operation window, select an NE and click the menu item
Performance -> Card Running State Management-> Current
State Management to go to Current State Management dialog box.
2. Select board to be queried in Resource list box, and then click the right
direction arrow to apply the selected board.
3. Click Refresh button, then the current VCG states are displayed in VCG
State list box.
[Result]
Current running state of board can be displayed in VCG State list box.
Querying History Running State
[Purpose]
Query the VCG states of all or specified boards of all or specified NEs, and
also all VCG states in some historical period.
[Applicable NEs]
ZXMP S200, ZXMP S325, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S380 and ZXMP
S390
[Steps]
1. In the client operation window, select an NE and click the menu item
Performance -> Card Running State Management-> History
State Management to go to History State Management dialog box.
2. Select board to be queried in Resource list box, and then click the right
direction arrow to apply the selected board.
3. Set query type, query time, detection point, query NCP history data or
query the history data in backup file.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
218 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
4. Click Query button, the queried history VCG states are displayed in
VCG State list box.
[Result]
The queried VCG states can be displayed in VCG State list box.
Setting State Mask
[Purpose]
VCG state report and display can be masked.
[Applicable NEs]
ZXMP S200, ZXMP S325, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S380 and ZXMP
S390
[Steps]
1. In the client operation window, select an NE and click the menu item
Performance -> Card Running State Management-> State Mask
Setting to go to State Mask Setting dialog box.
2. Select Type, Board, Detection Point Type and State Source.
3. Click Add button to add the selected board and port to the mask list.
4. Click Apply button to send the commands.
[Result]
The state of VCG (EOS) port configured with state mask can not be
queried.
Setting State Threshold
[Purpose]
Query and set the threshold of VCG state.
Once the fault number of VCG resource/destination is beyond the specified
threshold, the board would report loss part of capacity of VCG resource
alarm and loss part of capacity of VCG destination alarm to notify the user
of exceeding faults. VCG state threshold can be set according to each NE.
The default threshold of VCG faults is 50%.
[Applicable NEs]
ZXMP S200, ZXMP S325, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S380 and ZXMP
S390

Chapter 7 - Performance Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 219
[Steps]
1. In the client operation window, select an NE and click the menu item
Performance -> Card Running State Management-> Set State
Threshold to go to Set State Threshold dialog box.
2. Click + before Type:VCG to collapse the type tree.
3. Click Threshold area to set the threshold value.
4. Click Apply button to send the commands.
[Result]
If the number of faults of VCG resource or VCG destination is beyond the
threshold, loss part of capacity of VCG resource alarm and loss part of
capacity of VCG destination alarm can be queried by the current alarm
management.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
220 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
This page is intentionally blank.

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 221
Ch a p t e r 8
Maintenance Operations

This chapter introduces maintenance operations of SDH NEs.

Note: Attention please! Any misoperation of maintenance may cause service
interruption or equipment malfunction. Please Read this chapter carefully before
performing maintenance operations.
Setting Loopback
[Purpose]
Through the loopback of an optical channel or tributary, the traffic is
transmitted from the transmitting port and received at the receiving port
of the NE. In the case of separating the communication links, the loopback
can be used to confirm the fault point of NEs and detect the working
status of nodes and transmission lines in the network.
Note: The loopback operation may result in traffic interruption, therefore be
careful while performing the loopback operation.
The operation principle of loopback is that keep the influences on traffic as little as
possible. For example, if a fault can be located through a tributary unit loopback,
the AU loopback should be avoided.

Loopback type
The loopback is divided into line loopback and terminal loopback
depending on the flow direction of signals between transmitting and
receiving ports.
The loopback from an optical line card to an optical port of it is the
line loopback, while the loopback in the opposite direction is the
terminal loopback.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
222 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The loopback from an electrical tributary card to an electrical
tributary port of it is the terminal loopback, while the loopback in
the opposite direction is the line loopback, as shown in Figure 128.
FI GURE 128 L OOPB ACK DI RECTI ONS


Relations between loopback points and cards
TAB L E 81 REL ATI ONS B ETWEEN L OOPB ACK POI NTS AND CARDS
Loopback
Point
ZXMP S380
ZXMP S390
ZXMP S330
ZXMP S325
ZXMP S360 ZXMP S320
ZXMP
S100
ZXMP
S310
ZXMP
S200
ZXMP S385
Port OL64, OL16
Optical line
card
- - -
Optical line
card/EL1
Optical line
card/LP1
VC11 - TT1 -
1.5M electrical
interface card
- TT1
1.5M
electrical
interface card
VC12
ET1
SGE2B
SFE8
ET1
SFE
EP1
SFE8
SFE4B
2M electrical
interface card
/SFE4/SFE4B
Tributary
card
ET1
2M electrical
interface
card/
SGEB/SFE8
VC3 -
ET3
TT3
ETT3
EP3
ET3
34M/45M
electrical
interface card
- -
34M/45M
electrical
interface card
VC4 ET4 ET4 EP4 - - - -
VC3-nc TGE2B - - - - - TGE2B
VC4-nc RSEA -
OI16
/OL4
- - -
-
AU3-nc -
Optical line
card
- - -
Optical line
card
Optical line
card/TGEB
AU4-nc
Optical line
card above
STM-4
Optical line
card above
STM-4
- - -
Optical line
card
STM-4 optical
line card
AU4 (AU3)
Optical line Optical line OI16/ES1/ Optical STM-1 Optical line
Optical line

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 223
Loopback
Point
ZXMP S380
ZXMP S390
ZXMP S330
ZXMP S325
ZXMP S360 ZXMP S320
ZXMP
S100
ZXMP
S310
ZXMP
S200
ZXMP S385
card/EL1 card/EL1/
RSEB
optical line
card of other
rate
interface card optical
interface
card
card/
EL1/TFE
card/LP1/SE/
RSEB
TU3 SE/RSEB RSEB - - - TFE SE/RSEB
TU12 SE/RSEB RSEB - - - TFE SE/RSEB
Ethernet
user port
SGE2B/RSEB/
SE/SFE8/
TGEB
SFE/RSEB SFE8/SFE4B SFE4/SFE4B - TFE
SGEB/SFE
/TGEB/SE/
RSEB
VCG (EOS) - - - - - TFE -
STM1
physical
optical
interface
- - - - - - OEL1
STM1
physical
electric
interface
- - - - - - OEL1

[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
Take NE E in the networking instance provided in Chapter 1 as an example.
To set the loopback for port 1 of the ET1[1-1-2] card.
[Steps]
1. Select NE E in the client operation window, and select the menu item
Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Set Loopback to access the Set
Loopback dialog box.
2. Input or select loopback parameters as given in Table 82.
TAB L E 82 SETTI NG L OOPB ACK PARAMETERS
Interface Parameter Parameter Setting
Detection Card ET1[1-1-2]
Loopback Type Line Side
Type VC12
Insert Point
Port No. 1

3. Click the Add button to add the loopback configuration.
4. Click the Apply button to confirm the configuration.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
224 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Note: For ZXMP S390, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S325
and ZXMP S200, automatic clear and LoopbackTime are available. That is
loopback can be automatically cleared after loopback time to avoid the operators
forgetting to clear the loopback so that the service will be influenced on.
But ZXMP S100, ZXMP S320 and ZXMP S360do not support this function.

[Result]
Double-click NE E in the client operation window and the loopback icon
is displayed on the card ET1[1-1-2] in the Card Management dialog box.

Checkpoint: After finishing the loopback, it must be cacelled in time;
otherwise it will influence traffic.
The icon on the NE icon will disappear when the loopback is cancelled.
Inserting Alarms
[Purpose]
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) can be inserted manually to check whether
the channel is in good connection or the protection switching is correct. If
there is no problem, the corresponding channel of the receiving end should
detect the AIS alarm.
Alarm type: Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
Relations between alarm insertion points and cards
TAB L E 83 REL ATI ONS B ETWEEN AL ARM I NSERTI ON POI NTS AND CARDS
Alarm
Inser-
tion
Point
ZXMP S380
ZXMP S390
ZXMP S330
ZXMP S325
ZXMP S360 ZXMP S320
ZXMP
S100
ZXMP
S310
ZXMP
S200
ZXMP S385
TU11 - TT1 -
1.5M electrical
interface card
- TT1
1.5M electrical
interface card
TU12
ET1/SGE2B/
SFE8/SE/
RSEB (EOS
port)
ET1/SFE/
RSEB
EP1/SFE8/
SFE4B
2M electrical
interface card/
SFE4/SFE4B
Tributary
card
ET1/TFE
2M electrical
interface
card/SFE/
SFEB/SE/
RSEB
TU3
ET3/TT3/SE/
RSEB
ET3/TT3/
ETT3/RSEB
EP3/ET3
34M/45M
electrical
interface card
- TFE
34M/45M
electrical
interface card/
SE/RSEB

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 225
Alarm
Inser-
tion
Point
ZXMP S380
ZXMP S390
ZXMP S330
ZXMP S325
ZXMP S360 ZXMP S320
ZXMP
S100
ZXMP
S310
ZXMP
S200
ZXMP S385
MS
Optical line
card/
EL1/ATMcard
Optical line
card/EL1/
ATM card
OI16/ES1/
optical line
card of other
rate/ATM card
Optical
interface
card/ATM card
-
Optical line
card/EL1
Optical line
card/LP1/
ATM card/
OEL1
VC4-nc RSEA - OI16/OL4 - - - -
AU3-nc
Optical line
card/TGE2B
Optical line
card
- - -
Optical line
card
Optical line
card
AU4-nc
Optical line
card above
STM-4
Optical line
card above
STM-4
- - -
Optical line
card
Optical line
card above
STM-4
AU4/
AU3
Optical line
card/EL1/
ATM card/
SE/RSEB
Optical line
card/EL1/
RSEB/ATM
card
OI16/ES1/
optical line
card of other
rate/ATM card
Optical
interface
card/ATM card
STM-1
optical
interface
card
Optical line
card/
EL1/TFE
Optical line
card/LP1/
ATM card/SE/
RSEB/OEL1

[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
Take NE C in the networking instance provided in Chapter 1 as an
example.To insert an alarm to OL64[1-1-3] of NE C.
[Steps]
1. Select NE C in the client operation window, and select the menu item
Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Insert Alarm to access the Insert
Alarm dialog box.
2. Set parameters for inserting an alarm as given in Table 84.
TAB L E 84 SETTI NG PARAMETERS FOR I NSERTI NG AN AL ARM
Interface Parameter Parameter Setting
Detection Card OL64[1-1-3]
Insertion Type AIS
Type MS
Insert Point
Port No. 1

3. Click the Add button.
4. Click the Apply button.
[Result]
In this example, double-click NE C in the client operation window and the
alarm insertion icon is displayed on the card OL64[1-1-3] in the Card
Management dialog box. In addition, this card reports an AIS alarm.
The corresponding channel of the receiving end reports an AIS alarm.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
226 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
If insertion type is TU3 and bidirectional traffic is configured, the
insertion point will report a Remote Defect Indication (RDI) alarm in
addition to the AIS alarm.
In a protected network, the protection switch event can be queried
without interrupting any traffic. If the traffic is interrupted, it indicates
an abnormity happened during the switch. Check the line or the
relevant card.

Checkpoint: The alarm insertion operation must be cancelled in time;
otherwise it will impact traffic.
Inserting Bit Error
[Purpose]
Insert a bit error on an optical line or tributary forcibly to check channel
quality. For successful insertion, performance values of the bit error can be
queried at the abutting end.
Bit error types
Bit errors inserted vary with insertion points, as listed in Table 85
TAB L E 85 BI T ERROR TYPES
Bit Error Type Insertion Point
B1 bit error RS
B2 bit error MS
B3 bit error VC3, VC4, VC4-nc, and VC3-nc
V5 bit error VC12 and VC11

Relations between insertion points and cards
TAB L E 86 REL ATI ON B ETWEEN I NSERTI ON POI NTS AND CARDS
Inser-
tion
Point
ZXMP S380
ZXMP S390
ZXMP S330
ZXMP S325
ZXMP S360 ZXMP S320
ZXMP
S100
ZXMP
S310
ZXMP
S200
ZXMP S385
VC11 - TT1 -
1.5M
electrical
interface card
- TT1
1.5M electrical
interface card
VC12
ET1/SGE2B/
SFE8/SE/
RSEB
ET1/SFE/
RSEB
EP1/SFE8/
SFE4B
2M electrical
interface card
/SFE4/SFE4B
Tributary
card
ET1/TFE
2M electrical
interface card
/SFE/
SGEB/SE/RSEB

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 227
Inser-
tion
Point
ZXMP S380
ZXMP S390
ZXMP S330
ZXMP S325
ZXMP S360 ZXMP S320
ZXMP
S100
ZXMP
S310
ZXMP
S200
ZXMP S385
VC3
ET3/TT3/EL1
/optical line
card/TGE2B/
SE/RSEB
ET3/TT3/ETT
3/EL1/ optical
line
card/RSEB
EP3/ET3
34M/45M
electrical
interface card
-
optical
line card
/EL1/TFE
34M/45M
electrical
interface card
/TGEB/SE/RSEB
/OEL1
VC4
EL1/ optical
line card
/ATM
card/TGE2B/
SE/RSEB
EL1/ optical
line card/ATM
card/RSEB
EP4/
ATM card
Optical
interface
card/
ATM card
STM-1
optical
interface
card
optical
line card
/EL1/TFE
Optical
interface
card/ATM
card/TGEB/SE/
RSEB/OEL1
MS/RS
EL1/ optical
line card
/ATM card
EL1/ optical
line card
/ATM card
OI16/ES1/
optical line card
of other
rate/ATM card
Optical
interface
card/
ATM card
-
optical
line card
/EL1
optical line card
/LP1/ATM card/
OEL1
VC4-nc
Optical line
card above
STM-4/RSEA
Optical line
card above
STM-4
OI16/OL4 - -
optical
line card
Optical line
card above
STM-4
VC3-nc
optical line
card/TGE2B
optical line
card
- - -
optical
line card
optical line card
/TGEB

[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
Take NE C in the networking instance provided in Chapter 1 as an
example.To insert a bit error to 2#AUG of port 1 on OL64[1-1-3] card.
[Steps]
1. Select NE C in the client operation window, and select the menu item
Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Insert Error Code to access the
Insert Error Code dialog box.
2. Set parameters for inserting a bit error as given in Table 87
TAB L E 87 SETTI NG PARAMETERS FOR I NSERTI NG A BI T ERROR
Interface Parameter Parameter Setting
Detection Card OL64[1-1-3]
Type VC4
Port No. 1
Mapping mode AU4
Insert Point
AUG No. 2

3. Click the Add button.
4. Click the Apply button.


ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
228 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
[Result]
Bit errors of this type can be queried from the corresponding channel at
the receiving end with the current performance management function.
The B2/B3 bit error inserted manually imposes no influence on traffic, and
no bit error can be detected by the meters. It can be queried only from
the EMS terminal.
If the insertion point is a high-order VC3 and is configured as bidirectional
traffic, about the same amount of remote bit errors can be detected on the
insertion point card.
In this example, double-click NE C in the client operation window and the
alarm insertion icon is displayed on the card OL64[1-1-3] in the Card
Management dialog box. In addition, the B3 bit error can be queried from
2#AUG on card OL64[1-1-6] of NE B.

Checkpoint: The bit error insertion operation must be cancelled in time;
otherwise it will impact traffic.
Setting Protection Switching
[Purpose]
For an NE configured with MSP ring, SNCP or RPR protection, execute the
protection switching command to force it to deliver the protection switch
command. It is applicable to all SDH NEs. However the ZXMP S100 can
only conduct the subnet connection protection switching.
Switching commands
Lock: Forbid any access to the protection section/channel.
Force Switch: Unless another switch instruction of equal or higher
priority is active, the system will switch to the working/protection
section (or channel), no matter whether the section/channel is
faulty or not.
Manual Switch: Unless another switch instruction of equal or
higher priority is active or the switching section/channel fails, the
system will switch to the working/protection section (or channel) as
required.
Exercise: Only process the APS protocol without influencing the
normal running of network.
Only such MSP switching composed by ZXMP S390, ZXMP S380,
ZXMP S385, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S325, or ZXMP S200 supports the
switching exercise command.
Switching command priority (higher to lower)

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 229
Lock > Force Switch > Manual Switch > Exercise
[Applicable NEs]
It is applicable to all the SDH NEs. Note that for ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390,
ZXMP S330, ZXMP S385 and ZXMP S325, MSP, SNCP and RPR switching
can be performed. For ZXMP S360 and ZXMP S320, MSP and SNCP are
performed. For ZXMP S100, only SNCP is performed.
[Steps]
1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item
Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Protection Switch to access the
Protection Switch dialog box
2. Click the Set SMP Switch tab or the Set SNCP Switch tab according
to the protection type of this NE.
3. Select the switch type, switch state, switch mode, source card, port No.
and other parameters as needed.
4. Click the Add button.
5. Click the Apply button.
[Result]
If the button on the toolbar of the client operation window is
depressed, the icon appears on the NE icon if the source card for
performing the switching is an optical line card.
Select the NE in the client operation window and enter the Query
Protection Switch State page in the Protection Switch dialog box to
query the switching command, which should be the same as the one set
before.
Setting APS Operation of MSP
[Purpose]
Check, configure the APS ID by APS operation of MSP.The APS ID is the
unique ID of an NE in the MSP ring network.
Table 88 lists the meaning of APS operations supported by the ZXONM
E300.
TAB L E 88 MEANI NGS OF APS PARAMETERS
Parameter Meaning
APS start
In the case that the APS protocol is working properly, the MP
protection ring is working in APS state.
When the MSP group is configured, the APS should be started.
APS stop
The APS protocol stops working and keeps the data before stopping.
For instance, if MSP switching happens at a site, the original MSP

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
230 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Parameter Meaning
switching operation will be kept after the APS stops, and the new
data will not be processed.
APS reset
The APS data is cleared completely and the NE data is initialized.
After reset, the working status of system recovers. The system waits
for new data, and performs automatic protection switching.

[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
Refer to the ASP operation described in the section of Configuring Two-
fiber Bidirectional MSP in Chapter 1 for the detailed information about the
operations of querying and configuring the APS.

Note: The APS operation is only applicable to the MSP ring and the APS
command set on each NE in a protection group must be identical.
After the APS is reset successfully, the APS ID should be restarted.
Resetting Cards
[Purpose]
The resetting of chips or application programs of cards is divided into the
hardware reset and software reset. It is applicable to online NEs in normal
communication with the EMS.
Hardware reset: resets all chips in a card by the cable from NCP board
to other boards.
Software reset: resets application programs in a card by s interface.
For ZXMP S380 and ZXMP S390, software reset of CPU level is
supported. For ZXMP S330, ZXMP S385 and ZXMP S325, the software
reset is classified into CPU level and IC level reset. The software
resetting supported by other types of NEs has no levels like this.
Danger:
The purpose of resetting is to recover the normal working of the card. Therefore,
never perform the reset operation unless it is confirmed that the card function is
affected by the processor fault.
The software resetting is abnormally under the condition of abnormal S interface,
only hardware resetting is available.

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 231
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item
Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Reset Card to access the Reset
Card dialog box.
2. Select a card to be reset, and select the reset type.
3. Click the Reset button.
[Result]
Observe the indicator on the front panel of the reset card, which should
indicate that the card is in the reset status.
Querying Maintenance State
[Purpose]
Query maintenance type and maintenance point of an NE.Maintenance
operations include inserting bit errors, inserting alarms and loopback.
[Applicable NEs]
The querying of maintenance state is applicable only to ZXMP S100, ZXMP
S320 and ZXMP S385 NEs that are online and in normal communication
with the EMS.
[Steps]
Select an NE with maintenance operations performed in the client
operation window, and select the menu item Maintenance -> Diagnosis
-> Query Maintenance State to pop up the Query Maintenance State
dialog box.
[Result]
Then the maintenance state of the NE will be displayed in the dialog box.
Setting Forced State of CS Card
[Purpose]
Generally, two CS (cross-connect) cards are installed in an SDH NE for
mutual protection. Use the obliged state command to select a CS card.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
232 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Different forced state commands implement different functions, as listed in
Table 89.
TAB L E 89 CS CARD FORCED STATE COMMANDS
Main CS Card Standby CS Card
NE
Slot
No.
Card Slot
No.
Card
Obliged State
ZXMP
S380
ZXMP
S390
4 CS 5 CS
ZXMP
S385
8
CS module
of CS card
9
CS module
of CS card
Service bus and
overhead bus of these
NEs are in multi-bus
structure. The CS card
forced state command is
used to query or force
the bus selection.
ZXMP
S360
8 CS 9 CS
Query and forced
selection of the CS card
working state.
ZXMP
S320
6 CSB 7 CSB
ZXMP
S330
9 CS 10 CS
ZXMP
S325
7
CS module
of OCSx
card
8
CS module
of OCSx
card
Force the CS card
selection, set the
switching command, and
query the current
working CS card.

[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs except ZXMP S100 and ZXMP S310
[Steps]
1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item
Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> CSx Card Forced State to access the
CSx Card Forced State dialog box of the NE.
2. Select the CSx card state or switching command as needed.
3. Click the Apply button.
[Result]
In the case that the NE keeps communication with the EMS, click Query
and the query results displayed on the dialog box shall be the same as
those configured.
Setting Main/Standby NCP
Switching
[Purpose]

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 233
ZXMP S385 NE is equipped with two NCP cards for the 1+1 protection of
NCP card. The ZXONM E300 provides the function of switching between
the main NCP and standby NCP, as well as query of the card working
status.
[Applicable NEs]
ZXMP S385 that is online and is communicating with the EMS normally.
[Steps]
1. Issue the switching command
i. Select a ZXMP S385 NE in the client operation window. Click the
Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> NCP MasterSlaveBrd Switch
menu item to enter the NCP MasterSlaveBrd Switch dialog box.
ii. Select the Switch Type and Switch Card.
iii. Click the Apply button.
2. Query the current working NCP card
i. Select the ZXMP S385 NE in the client operation window. Click the
Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> NCP MasterSlaveBrd Switch
menu item to enter the NCP MasterSlaveBrd Switch dialog box.
ii. Click the Update button.
[Result]
The query result shown in the MasterSlaveBrd Switch dialog box should
be same with the settings.
Orienting OW Error
[Purpose]
Check if the OW board is running normally by testing the signaling. Two
testing modes are supported:
Mode 1: E1, E2 and the protection byte are all F0
Mode 2: E1, E2 and the protection byte are all 0F
Only when the NE is online and the communication with EMS is normally,
the operation is valid.
[Applicable NEs]
ZXMP S330, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S385 and ZXMP S325
configured with OW board;
ZXMP S360 configured with OHP board
ZXMP S320 configured with OW board

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
234 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
[Steps]
1. In the client operation window, select an NE except ZXMP S100, and
click the menu item Maintenance -> Test -> OW Error Auto
Orientation to pop up OW Error Orientation dialog box.
2. Click an NE to be tested in the NE OW State list box.
3. Select the test signaling.
4. Click Test button to send the testing command, then state icon before
the selected NE turns into yellow, which means non report. After testing,
the state icon of the NE and the State align show the testing result.
5. Click Reset button to cancel the testing signaling and reset the tested
NE as well.
6. Click Close button to exit the OW Error Orientation dialog box and
return to the client operation window.
Note: After testing, the testing signalling should be cancelled by clicking
Reset button timely in order to avoid the interruption of service.
[Result]
After testing, the state icon of the NE and the State align show the testing
result. If the state displayed is wrong, click the NE, the wrong board and
port No. should be shown in the Result list box.
Testing Communication
[Purpose]
Test the communication status between an NE card and the EMS.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs except ZXMP S310
The communication test is applicable only to online NEs in normal
communication with the EMS.
[Steps]
1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item
Maintenance -> Test -> Communication Test to access the
Communication Test dialog box.
2. Select a card and module No. for the test.
3. Click the Apply button.

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 235
[Result]
For normal communication, the success information is displayed in Test
Result. For communication failure, the EMS displays an alert box
indicating the reason.
Ethernet Maintenance
This section only introduces some maintenance operations common used.
Querying VLAN Bridge Running State
[Purpose]
The running status of the VLAN bridge can be queried when a card serves
as a virtual bridge.
[Applicable NEs]
The SDH NEs equipped with SFE/SGE/SE card or RSEB card, which are
online and are communicating with the EMS normally. The cards
supporting this operation include Ethernet, RSEB and SE card.
[Steps]
1. Select an online NE in the client operation window, and select the
menu item Maintenance -> Ethernet Maintenance -> Query VLAN
Bridge Running State to access the Query VLAN Bridge Running
State dialog box.
2. Select a card serving as the bridge in the CardName drop-down list
box.
3. Click the Query button. And then the running status of the bridge is
displayed in the dialog box.
[Result]
The query result will be displayed in the Query VLAN Bridge Running
State dialog box.
Querying Running State of Physical Port
[Purpose]
Query the running state of ports on SGE/SFE series Ethernet/RSEA cards.
[Applicable NEs]
The SDH NEs equipped with SFE/SGE card or RSEA card, which are online
and are communicating with the EMS normally

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
236 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
[Steps]
1. Select an online NE in the client operation window, and select the
menu item Maintenance -> Ethernet Maintenance -> Data Card
Ports Running State to access the Data Card Ports Running State
dialog box.
2. Select a card to be queried in the CardName drop-down list box.
3. Click the Query button. And then the running state of the ports on the
Ethernet card is displayed in the dialog box.
[Result]
The running state of the Ethernet board will be displayed in the Data Card
Ports Running State dialog box.
Querying Multicast State
[Purpose]
Query multicast state of a Ethernet card.
[Applicable NEs]
The SDH NEs equipped with SFE/SGE/SE card or RSEA/RSEB card, which
are online and are communicating with the EMS normally
[Steps]
1. Select an online NE in the client operation window, and select the
menu item Maintenance -> Ethernet Maintenance -> Query
Broad State to access the Query BroadStat dialog box.
2. Select a card to be queried in the CardName drop-down list box.
3. Click the Query button. And then the multicast state of the Ethernet
card is displayed in the dialog box.
[Result]
The multicast state will be displayed in the Query BroadStat dialog box.
Querying LCAS Running State of Virtual
Concatenation
[Purpose]
Query the LCAS running status of virtual concatenation
In the case that system ports of cards are in virtual concatenation mode,
which adopts the Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS), the LCAS
running state of each timeslot of the system port can be queried.

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 237
[Applicable NEs]
The SDH NEs equipped with SFE/SGE/SE card, RSEB card, or TGEB card
(with the software/hardware version of 0320); which are online and are
communicating with the EMS normally
[Steps]
1. Select an online NE in the client operation window, and select the
menu item Maintenance -> Ethernet Maintenance -> LCAS
Running State of Virtual Concat to access the LCAS Running
State of Virtual Concat dialog box.
2. Select a card to be queried in the CardName drop-down list box.
3. Click the Query button. And then the LCAS state of the Ethernet card
will be displayed in the dialog box.
[Result]
The LCAS state of Ethernet board will be displayed in the LCAS Running
State of Virtual Concat dialog box.
Querying RPR Ring Topology
[Purpose]
Query the RPR topology.
[Applicable NEs]
Online NEs configured with RSEB-EOS and RSEB-RPR board, which is
communicated with EMS normally.
[Steps]
1. In the client operation window, select an NE and click the menu item
Maintenance -> Ethernet Maintenance -> Query RPR Net Topo to
pop up Query RPR Net Topo dialog box.
2. Select the board and port to be queried.
3. Click Query button.
[Result]
The configured RPR topology should be displayed in the PRP top dialog box.
Querying RPR Ring Topology State
[Purpose]
Query the topology state of RPR ring

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
238 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The topology state of RPR ring includes the addresses of other sites on the
ring, whether the RPR external ring and internal ring are reachable for
other sites, and the hops to other sites.
[Applicable NEs]
Node NEs on RPR rings, i.e. ZXMP S380/ZXMP S390 equipment equipped
with RSEA card or ZXMP S330 equipped with RSEB card in non-pass-
through state. The NEs must be online and in normal communication with
the EMS.
[Steps]
1. Select an online NE in the client operation window, and select the
menu item Maintenance -> Ethernet Maintenance -> RPR Ring
Topology State to access the RPR Ring Topo State dialog box.
2. Select a card to be queried in the CardName drop-down list box.
3. Click the Query button. And then the state of the ring where the
RSEA/RSEB card is located is displayed in the dialog box.
[Result]
The RPR ring state where RSEA board or RSEB board lies in will be
displayed in the RPR Ring Topo State dialog box.
Querying RPR Physical Port Running
State
[Purpose]
Query the running state of RPR physical ports.
The RPR physical ports include the user ports, system RPR ports and
system SPAN ports of RSEA card.
[Applicable NEs]
ZXMP S380 or ZXMP S390 NEs equipped with RSEA card, which are online
and are communicating with the EMS normally
[Steps]
1. Select an online NE in the client operation window, and select the
menu item Maintenance -> Ethernet Maintenance -> RPR Port
Run State to access the RPR Port Run State dialog box.
2. Select a card to be queried in the CardName drop-down list box.
3. Click the Query button. And then the running state of alls ports on the
RSEA card is displayed in the dialog box.
[Result]
The running state of all ports on RSEA board will be displayed in the RPR
Port Run State dialog box.

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 239
Querying MSTP Universal
[Purpose]
Query the MSTP information.
The query contents include port information, STP attributes, STP port
attributes, card attributes, VLAN information, transparent transmission
information, ingress rate, MAC address table, LCAS state, version
information, VCG port information, and VCG TS information.
[Applicable NEs]
SDH NEs equipped with SE card or RSEB card, which are online and are
communicating with the EMS normally
[Steps]
1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item
Maintenance -> Ethernet Maintenance -> Universal query of
MSTP to access the Universal query of MSTP dialog box.
2. Select a card to be queried in the CardName drop-down list box.
3. Click the Query button. And then the running state of the RSEB/SE
card is displayed in this dialog box.
[Result]
The running state of RSEB board or SE board will be displayed in the
Universal query of MSTP dialog box.
Setting Port Mirroring
[Purpose]
Use an idle port (mirror port) to mirror a port with traffic (mirrored port)
so as to obtain data packets of the port. Combining with the network
packet capture tool, the contents in traffic data frames carried by the
mirrored port can be analyzed so as to locate possible faults.
Mirroring mode
Send: The mirror port obtains a transmitted data packet of the
mirrored port.
Receive: The mirror port obtains a received date packet of the
mirrored port.
Mirror cards and ports

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
240 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
TAB L E 90 CARDS AND PORTS SUPPORTI NG PORT MI RROR
NE Type Card Type Port Type
ZXMP S320 and
ZXMP S360
SFE/SGE System port and user port
SFE/SGE System port and user port
RSEA User port
RSEB User port and VCG (EOS) port
ZXMP S380 and
ZXMP S390
SE User port and VCG (EOS) port
SFE System port and user port
ZXMP S330
RSEB User port and VCG (EOS) port
ZXMP S325 SFE System port and user port
SFE/SGE System port and user port
SE User port and VCG (EOS) port ZXMP S385
RSEB User port and VCG (EOS) port
ZXMP S200 SE User port and internal Ethernet port

[Applicable NEs]
SDH NEs equipped with SFE/SGE/SE card or RSEA/RSEB card, which are
online and are communicating with the EMS normally
[Steps]
1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item
Maintenance -> Diagnosis -> Port Mirror to access the Port
Mirror dialog box.
2. Select the card, mirror type, mirror port and mirrored port.
3. Click Add to add a mirror record to the mirror list.
4. Click the Apply button.
[Result]
The contents in service data frames carried by the mirrored port are
available for analysis combining with the network packet capture tool.
Setting Data Board Ping Function
[Purpose]
Check if the communication between the data board and the destination is
normal by pinging the destination IP address from data board.
[Applicable NEs]
ZXMP S330, ZXMP S325, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S200 and ZXMP
S385 equipped with SE, RSEB, RSEB-EOS and TFE board. The NEs is
online and communicates with EMS normally.

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 241
[Steps]
1. Start the Ping function of data board
i. In the client operation window, double click an NE to open Card
Management dialog box.
ii. Right-click the data board to set the Ping function, and then select
Property in the shortcut menu to go to the Card Property dialog
box.
iii. In the Card Property dialog box, click Advanced.. button to go to
the Advanced.. dialog box.
iv. Click Data Card Property tab to go to the Data Card Property
page.
v. Input IP address of the board in the IP Address spin box. And
select Enable in Ping Enable drop-down list box.
vi. Click OK button to make the settings valid.
2. In the client operation window, select the data board which has started
the Ping function, and click Maintenance -> Ethernet Maintenance -
> DtBoard Ping menu item to go to DtBoard Ping dialog box.
3. Select the data board which has started the Ping function, input VLAN
ID, Bag Length, and Wait Timeout.
4. Input destination IP or select he destination IP from All Data Board area.
5. Click Start PING button.
[Result]
In the Ping function dialog box, the Ping result and statistic information
are displayed.
Querying Card Version
[Purpose]
Query PCB version, software version, and FPGA version of all the cards in
the selected NEs.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs except ZXMP S360 that are online and are communicating
with the EMS normally
[Steps]
1. Select an applicable NE in the client operation window. Click the
Maintenance -> Query Board Version menu item to enter the Query
all boards version dialog box, as shown in Figure 129. The NE to be

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
242 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
queried list in the NE List list box lists all the NEs that support query
of card version.
FI GURE 129 QUERY AL L B OARDS VERSI ON DI AL OG B OX

2. If it is necessary to select other NEs, click the Condition button to
enter the Query all boards version filter dialog box, where other
NEs can be selected. Click the Apply button and then the Close
button to return to the Query all boards version dialog box.
3. Click the Query button.
[Result]
If the query succeeded, the Query all boards version result dialog box
shown in Figure 130 will pop up. For cards that support card version query,
the dialog box displays the PCB version, software version, FPGA version,
and quantity of the cards; for cards that do not support card version query,
the dialog box only displays the card slot information.

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 243
FI GURE 130 QUERY AL L B OARDS VERSI ON RESUL T DI AL OG BOX

Setting Time Management
[Purpose]
Query the NCP time of an NE and verify it as per the EMS time; and check
if the NE can communicate with the EMS normally
Through the time management command, check the channel between an
NE and the EMS, and query the NCP time of the NE. Thus correct the NCP
time based on the background time of the EMS.
[Applicable NEs]
SDH NEs that are online and are communicating with the EMS normally
[Steps]
1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item
Maintenance -> Time Management to access the Time
Management dialog box.
2. Click the Query button to display the NCP time of the selected NE.
3. Click the Verify Time button to verify the NCP time of the selected
NE; while click the Verify All NE button to verify the NCP time of all
NEs managed by the Manager.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
244 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
[Result]
If the NCP card succeeded to report the NCP time, the Time
Management dialog box displays NCP Time and NMS Time of the
selected NE, as shown in Figure 131.
FI GURE 131 TI ME MANAGEMENT DI AL OG BOX

If the NCP card failed to report the NCP time, a prompt box will pop up
indicating the failure reason, and the NCP time in the Time Management
dialog box will be displayed as ---.
Configuring NE Synchronous
Time
[Purpose]
Configure synchronous mode and time interval of NE. If NTP is adopted,
NTP server must be set as well.
The synchronous mode includes:
No Sync: the time of NE is not synchronous with that of EMS server or
NTP server.
Auto Sync: the time of NE is synchronous with that of EMS server. If
not, correct the time of NE according to that of EMS service.
NTP Sync: the time of NE is synchronous with that of NTP server. If not,
correct the time of NE according to that of NTP service.

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 245
[Applicable NEs]
All SDH NEs, which are online and communicate with EMS normally
[Steps]
1. In the client operation window, select an NE and click Maintenance->
Ne Sync Time Config menu item to go to Ne Sync Time Config
dialog box. Set SyncMode is the defaulted page.
2. Input Time Interval and then select SyncMode.
3. Click Apply button to make the settings valid.
4. If NTP Sync is adopted, click Set NTP Server tab to go to Set NTP
Server page.
i. Click Add.. button to pop up Set NEW NTP Server dialog box.
ii. Input the IP address of the new NTP server and select the priority.
iii. Click Apply button to make the settings valid and return to the Ne
Sync Time Config dialog box.
iv. Select if to lock the NTP server based on the requirement.
v. Click Apply button to make the settings of NTP server valid.
vi. Click Close button to exit the Ne Sync Time Config dialog box.
Note: An NE can set 5 NTP servers at most. NE can select NTP server
automatically according to NTP servers priority. Once the NTP server with high
priority can not be used, the NE would select another NTP server with the priority
next to the high one.
If the NTP server is locked, the NE synchronize with the locked NTP server.
[Result]
If the setting is successful, the display area in the Ne Sync Time Config
dialog box will display the result. If not, the display area displays the
failure reason.
Querying SFP
[Purpose]
Query related information about SFP.
[Applicable NEs]
ZXMP S200, ZXMP S325, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S380 and ZXMP
S390.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
246 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
[Steps]
1. In the client operation window, select an NE and click Maintenance->
Query SPF menu item to go to Query SPF dialog box.
2. Select the board to be queried.
3. Click the Query button.
[Result]
The SPF information is listed in the SPF info list. Select any row, click
Detail button to pop up the detailed SPF parameter information.
Setting SFP Statistics
[Purpose]
Query the SPF serial No. of NE supporting the SPF.
[Applicable NEs]
ZXMP S200, ZXMP S325, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S380 and ZXMP
S390.
[Steps]
1. In the client operation window, select an NE and click Maintenance->
SPF Statistics menu item to go to SPF Statistics dialog box.
2. Click the Query Condition button to pop up the Query Condition
dialogue box. Configure the NEs to be set.
3. Click the Apply button to confirm the modification.
4. Click the Close button to return the SPF Statistics interface.
5. Click the Query button to query the SPF information.
[Result]
If the message is sent successfully, pop up the SPF querying result, as
shown in Figure 132.

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 247
FI GURE 132 SPF QUERY RESUL T DI AL OGUE BOX

Setting Daily Fault Report
[Purpose]
It supports daily fault report function, to query the all alarm, event, over-
threshold alarm which are happened in current time.
Faults are put in order by the appearance time by default. It means that
the fault occurs last will be displayed in front of the list.
[Applicable NEs]
All SDH NEs, which are online and communicate with EMS normally
[Steps]
1. In the client operation window, select an NE and click Maintenance->
Daily Fault Report menu item to go to Daily Fault Report dialog
box.
2. Select NE to be queried in the Resource list. Click the arrow icon
pointing towards the right on the Resource toolbar to execute it.
3. Configure the types of Time Period and Fault.
4. Click the Query button.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
248 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
[Result]
If the command is sent successfully, all daily fault report meeting the
query conditions will be shown in the fault list
Setting the Consistency of Ne's
Data
[Purpose]
Through setting the start time, period, NE and data item, complete the
configuration for timely executing the consistency of Ne's data. If
immediate applying is selected, the function of the consistency of Ne's
data will be executed at once.
[Applicable NEs]
All SDH NEs, which are online and communicate with EMS normally
[Steps]
1. In the client operation window, select an NE and click Maintenance->
Consistency of NEs Data menu item to go to The Consistency of
NEs Data dialog box.
2. Configure the Start Time and Period for executing the consistency
NEs data in the certain time.
3. Click the select box before the NE in the Set NE list to select the NE.
4. Choose the data type in the Data Item list.
5. Click Add button to add the consistency of NEs data in Config Info
list.
6. If it is clicked in the Apply at once box (as the symbol ""), click
Apply button to execute the consistency of NE's data. Otherwise,
according to the testing start time and period to execute the
consistency of NEs data in a certain time.
[Result]
1. If it is clicked in the Apply at once box (as the symbol ""), click
Apply button to execute the consistency of NE's data immediately. The
pop up dialogue box is shown in Figure 133.

Chapter 8 - Maintenance Operations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 249
FI GURE 133 CONSI STENCY OF NE' S DATA I MMEDI ATEL Y DI AL OG BOX


2. If it is not clicked in the Apply at once box, click Apply button to
execute the consistency of NE's data periodically. The pop up dialogue
box is shown in Figure 134.
FI GURE 134 CONSI STENCY OF NE' S DATA PERI ODI CAL L Y DI AL OG BOX



ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
250 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Setting Optical Power Statistic
[Purpose]
Query the single or multiple NE's optical power
Query all the board and NE's optical power
Output the print report of optical power
Support printing reference value and offset threshold for the WDM
equipment
Support the function of report combination and print wihtin the whole
network
[Applicable NEs]
All SDH NEs, which are online and communicate with EMS normally
[Steps]
1. Optical Power statistics
Select one or more NE in the client operation window, select
Maintenance-> Optical Power Query menu item to go to the
performance management dialogue box.
Click Query button.
All the optical power information is displayed in the performance
display list.
2. Print optical power info
Select the information to be printed in the Performance display
area.
Click button to pop up ZTE Unitrans report dialogue box.
[Result]
1. All the optical power information is displayed in the performance
display list.
2. According to the practical requirements, it can be saved as various file
formats, or be printed directly.


Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 251
PART C
System Operations

PART C consists of only one chapter: Chapter 9 System Management,
which describes the system management operations including:
Security management: querying the NCP security log of SDH NEs.
NCP data management: managing NCP data of SDH NEs, including
database download/upload, upload comparison and automatic upload
comparison.
Report management: get statistics on the configuration, alarm and
performance information of the selected NE in the form of reports. It
facilitates the printing or saving operations. The reports are divided
into the configuration report, current alarm/performance report, and
history alarm/performance report.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
252 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION













This page is intentionally blank.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 253
Ch a p t e r 9
System Management

This chapter describes the operation of NCP security management, NCP
data management, and report management.
Note: This chapter only describes the system management functions related
to NE. For management of EMS database and EMS system, refer to the Unitrans
ZXONM E300 (V3.19) EMS/SNMS of Optical Network Operation Manual (Volume I)
Basic Operations for details.
Querying NCP Security Log
[Purpose]
The query of NCP security log queries the latest modified log of NCP data,
which covers the operation name, operator, and the operation time.
[Applicable NEs]
ZXMP S330, ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390, ZXMP S385, ZXMP S325, and ZXMP
S200 NEs which are online
[Steps]
Select an online NE in the client operation window, and select the menu
item Security -> NCP Security Log to access the NCP Security Log
dialog box. Then the querying result will be displayed in the dialog box,
including the DB file name, manager OID (manager ID) and operation time.
[Result]
The NCP security log including file name, manager OID and operation time
will be displayed in the NCP Security Log dialog box.


ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
254 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Note: NCP data management is available only for online NEs in normal
communication with the EMS.
NCP Data Management
Downloading Database
[Purpose]
After configuration and maintenance operations in the ZXONM E300, the
corresponding data should be downloaded to the NCP card of the selected
NE, which will forward corresponding data to relevant cards for
configuration.
[Applicable NEs]
All the online SDH NEs
[Steps]
1. Select the NE in the client operation window, and click the menu item
System -> NCP Data Management -> DB Download to enter the
Download DB dialog box.
2. Select the type of database to be downloaded in the Download DB list.
3. Click the Apply button to start the download process.
[Result]
After the download completes, select the NE whose data is downloaded,
and then select the menu item System -> NCP Data Management ->
DB Upload and Compare menu to pop up the Compare dialog box.
Select DB files to be compared in the Upload DB list box, and click the
Compare button to start comparing the original downloaded data and
upload data. The data uploaded from the NE database should be
completely consistent with the data saved in the EMS database.
Uploading Database
[Purpose]
The configuration data in the NCP card of the NE can be uploaded and
saved to the EMS database, overwriting the original data of this NE in it.
[Applicable NEs]
All the online SDH NEs

Chapter 9 - System Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 255
[Steps]
1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and then select the menu
item System -> NCP Data Management -> DB Upload and Save
menu to access the Upload DB dialog box.
2. Select the DB files to be uploaded in the Upload DB list.
3. Click the Upload button.
[Result]
After the upload completes, select the NE whose data is uploaded, and
then select the menu item System -> NCP Data Management -> DB
Upload and Compare menu to pop up the Compare dialog box.
Select DB files to be compared in the Upload DB list box, and click the
Compare button to start comparing the original downloaded data and
upload data. The data uploaded from the NE database should be
completely consistent with the data saved in the EMS database.
Uploading and Comparing Database
[Purpose]
Upload and compare the NE data information of an on-line NE
The data in the NCP of the selected NE can be uploaded to the EMS and
compared with the data of the same type stored in the EMS database
through this operation. If some data is different, they can be downloaded
or uploaded to achieve the consistency.
[Applicable NEs]
All the online SDH NEs
[Steps]
1. Select an on-line NE in the client operation window, and then select the
System -> NCP Data Management -> DB Upload and Compare
menu to access the Compare dialog box.
2. Select the item NE Information in the Upload DB list box.
3. Click the Compare button.
[Result]
After the comparison completes, the Upload and Compare dialog box
pops up to display the comparison result between the selected data at the
NE side and that at the EMS side, as shown in Figure 135.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
256 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
FI GURE 135 UPL OAD AND COMPARE DI A L OG BOX



Setting Board Upload and Compare
[Purpose]
Upload the timeslot of sub network protection to EMS Manager and
compare with the same type data saved in the EMS Manager.
[Applicable NEs]
ZXMP S385, ZXMP S330, ZXMP S325, ZXMP S320 online NEs, which are
communicate with EMS normally
[Steps]
1. In the client operation window, select an NE and click the menu item
System -> NCP Data Management -> Board Upload and Compare
to go to Board Upload and Compare dialog box.
2. Select TimeSlot check box, indicates the item has been selected.
3. Click Compare button.
[Result]
Once the command is executed successfully, the compare and upload
dialog box will display the comparison between the data of the selected
board and that of EMS Manager.


Chapter 9 - System Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 257
Uploading and Comparing Database
Automatically
[Purpose]
Set the upload start time, cycle, NE type and data type to for automatic
data uploading & comparing.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and select the menu item
System -> NCP Data Management -> Auto Upload and Compare
menu to access the Autoed Upload And Compare dialog box.
2. Enter the start time and period for automatic uploading and comparing.
3. In the Setting NE list box, select the NEs to be uploaded and
compared.
4. In the Data Item list box, select the type of data to be uploaded. The
symbol before the item indicates it has been selected.
5. Click Add to add the automatic upload and comparison record in the
Config Info list box, as shown in Figure 136.
6. Click Apply button to confirm the operation.
FI GURE 136 AUTOED UPL OAD AND COMPARE DI AL OG BOX




ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
258 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
[Result]
Select the configured NE in the client operation window, and select the
menu item System -> Log Management. Then you may find the upload
log of the NE in the Auto Comparing Log page of the Log
Administration dialog box.
Synchronizing NE Data into DB
[Purpose]
When ZXONM E300 uses the NCP database to synchronize data of itself,
the data synchronization of NE can be enabled or disabled if the
configuration data of the EMS is inconsistent with that of the SDH NE
There are three synchronization modes:
Stop: NEs are not involved in data synchronization.
Autoed upload and compare: When the configuration data of the
EMS and the actual NE are inconsistent, the system may pop up the
prompt box for users to save it manually according to actual situation.
Autoed synchronization NE data: When the configuration data of
the EMS and the actual NE are inconsistent, the system will
automatically upload the inconsistent data.
[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
1. Select an SDH NE in the client operation window, and then select the
System -> NCP Data Management -> Synchronous NE Data into
DB menu to access the Synchronous NE Data Configuration dialog
box.
2. Select the data synchronization mode of the NE.
3. Click the Apply button.
[Result]
For the inconsistent NE data, the relevant operations will be performed
according to the NE synchronization setting.
Clearing NCP Database
[Purpose]
The data saved in the NCP database can be cleared, while the IP address
will be kept for being supervised by the EMS. The NCP card will be reset
automatically and form a basic database. This operation is only applicable
to ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390 and ZXMP 385 which is online and in normal
communication with the EMS.

Chapter 9 - System Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 259
Danger: The reset of the card will result in traffic interruption after the NCP
database is cleared.

[Applicable NEs]
ZXMP S380, ZXMP S390 and ZXMP S200 online NEs which communicate
with the EMS normally
[Steps]
1. Select an applicable NE in the client operation window, and then select
the System -> NCP Data Management -> Clear NCP DB menu
item, the prompt box will pop up for confirmation.
2. Click the Yes button to delete the NCP database. And a prompt box
will pop up to display the operation result.
[Result]
A prompt box should pop up to prompt the operation result.
Report Management
ZXONM E300 support the report management function when the reporter
server is started. With this function, the user can make statistics on the
configuration, alarm and performance information of the currently selected
NE in the form of reports, facilitating the printing and restoring of these
information.
Note:
In the Unix operating system, the report server and the client GUI start up at
the same time.
In the Windows operating system, they start up separately. When the report
server starts, the icon should be displayed at the taskbar on the ZXONM E300
client computer screen. Users may select Start > Program > ZXONM E300 >
Report Server to start the report server.
Configuring Report
[Purpose]
Preview, print and save the card report. Reports of multiple NEs can be
queried at the same time.
[Applicable NEs]

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
260 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
All the SDH NEs
Take NE A and NE D in the networking instance provided in Chapter 1 as
example.
Checkpoint: Make sure that the Reprot Server has been started before the
report operations.
[Steps]
1. Select NE A and NE D in the client operation window, and then select
the Report -> Config Report menu to pop up the Config Report
dialog box.
2. In the Config Report Type list, click the item Card Report.
3. Click the Preview button to view the card report in the pop-up
Unitrans Report window, as shown in Figure 137.
4. Click the Print button to print the card report.
5. Click the Save As button to save the card report as a file of xls, rtf, txt,
pdf, or html format.
FI GURE 137 UNI TRANS REPORT WI NDOW

Configuring Current Alarm PSE Report
[Purpose]
Preview, print and save the current alarm PSE report of an NE.
The current alarm PSE report is classified into three kinds of reports, as
listed in Table 91. The system can form the report according to one or
more conditions being set.

Chapter 9 - System Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 261
The operations of previewing, printing and saving the reports are only
applicable to online NEs in normal communication with the EMS.
TAB L E 91 CURRENT AL ARM PSE REPORT L I ST
Report Type Optional Condition
Current Alarm
NE, alarm reason, acknowledgement information, alarm
severity and alarm type. Multiple items can be selected
in each condition.
Current Over Threshold Alarm
NE, performance item and acknowledgement
information. Multiple items can be selected in each
condition.
Current Protection Switch Event
(PSE)
NE and protection mode ((MSP, SNCP, card switch and
RPR switch, ATM switch and LSP switch). Only NE list
box supports multiple choices.

[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
1. Select an online NE in the client operation window, and then select the
menu item Report -> Current Alarm PSE Report menu to enter the
Current Alarm PSE Report dialog box.
2. Execute the following operations to enter the corresponding pages.
Click the Current Alarm tab to enter the Current Alarm page.
Click the Current Over Threshold Alarm tab to enter the
Current Over Threshold Alarm page.
Click the Current Protection Switch Event tab to enter the
Current Protection Switch Event page, and set conditions in the
corresponding pages.
3. Click Preview to view the report in the Unitrans Report window.
4. Click Print to print the alarm report.
5. Click the Save As button to save the alarm report as a file.
[Result]
The reports of Current alarm, current over threshold alarm and current
protection switch event can be previewed, printed and saved.
Configuring History Alarm Performance
PSE Report
[Purpose]
Preview, print and save the history alarm performance PSE report of an NE.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
262 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
The history alarm performance PSE report is divided into four kinds of
reports, as listed in Table 92. The system can form the report according to
one or more conditions being set. The operations of previewing, printing
and saving the reports are only applicable to online NEs in normal
communication with the EMS.
TAB L E 92 REPORTS OF HI STORY AL ARM PERFORMANCE PSE
Report Type Optional Condition
History Alarm
NE, alarm reason, acknowledgement information, alarm
severity alarm type and alarm reason. All these parameters
support multiple choices.
Supports the month report, quarter report or report in any
time period.
History Over
Threshold Alarm
NE, performance item, acknowledgement information, time
and backinfo. All these parameters support multiple choices.
Supports the month report, quarter report or report in any
time period.
History
Protection
Switch Event
NE and protection mode ((MSP, SNCP, card switch, RPR
switch, RPR switch, Clock Source PSE, ATM PSE and LSP
PSE). Only NE supports multiple choices.
Supports the month report, quarter report or report in any
time period.
History
Performance
NE, performance Item, granularity cycle, time and backinfo.
NE and performance support multiple choices.
Supports the month report, quarter report or report in any
time period.

[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and then select the menu
item Report -> History Alarm Performance PSE Report menu to
enter the History Alarm Performance PSE Report dialog box.
2. Execute the following operations to enter the corresponding pages.
Click the History Alarm tab to enter the History Alarm page.
Click the History Over Threshold Alarm tab to enter the History
Over Threshold Alarm page.
Click the History protection switch event tab to enter the
History Protection Switch Event page.
Click the History Performance tab to enter the History
Performance page.
3. Set conditions in the corresponding pages.

Chapter 9 - System Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 263
4. Click Preview to view the report in the Unitrans Report window
5. Click Print to print corresponding report.
6. Click Save As to save the alarm report as a file of xls, rtf, txt, pdf, or
html format.
[Result]
The reports of history alarm, history over threshold alarm, history
performance and history protection switch event can be previewed, printed
and saved.

Configuring Net Path Report
[Purpose]
The MS links, RS links and circuit services of the selected NE in the entire
network can be queried. And the query results can be displayed in
topology or list, which can be previewed and printed in the Net Path
Report window. The functions of the net path report are listed in Table 93.
TAB L E 93 NET PATH REPORTS

Report Type Description Function
Terminal
Service
Termination circuit
of the selected NE
The topology displays the routes of the
selected circuit in the list.
The list displays terminal NEs, card,
ports, direction and speed of the
termination circuit.
Merge the displayed circuits and display
the DDF and time slot information
Filter and query the valid circuit on the
basis of the current querying result.
Non-terminal
Service
Non-Termination
circuit of the
selected NE
The topology displays the routes of the
selected circuit in the list.
The list displays alarm state, terminal
NEs, card, ports, direction, speed, user
label and name of the non-termination
circuit which can be merged as circuit,
service alarm, performance and timeslot.
Filter and query the valid circuit on the
basis of the current querying result.
Exception
Circuit
Mismatched speed,
incorrect
concatenation,
wrong service with
abnormal
multiplexing mode
The topology displays the routes of the
selected path in the list
The list displays terminal NEs, card,
ports, direction, speed and name of the
non-termination circuit.
Exception RS
Link
Unidirectional
optical links in the
The list displays the source NE, destination NE,
source card, destination card, source port,

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
264 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Report Type Description Function
entire network destination port, source direction and destination
direction for the unidirectional optical connection
of the selected NE.

[Applicable NEs]
All the SDH NEs
[Steps]
1. Select an NE in the client operation window, and then select the menu
item Report -> Net Path Report to access the Net Path Ne Select
Dialog select box, as shown in Figure 138.
FI GURE 138 NET PATH NE SEL ECT DI AL OG BOX


2. More NEs can be selected and added into the Selected NE list box;
3. Click OK to enter the Net Path Report dialog box.
4. Execute the following operations to enter the corresponding pages.
Click the Terminal Service tab to enter the Terminal Service
page, as shown in Figure 139.
Click the Non-terminal Service tab to enter the Non-terminal
Service page.
Click the Exception Circuit tab to enter the Exception Circuit
page.

Chapter 9 - System Management
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 265
Click the Exception RSLink tab to enter the Exception RSLink
page.
FI GURE 139 NET PATH REPORT DI AL OG BOX ( EXCEPTI ON RSL I NK PAGE)


[Result]
Check if the MS link and RS link of the entire network and the circuit
service of the selected NE are correctly displayed. Click Print to display
the query result in a table.

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
266 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
This page is intentionally blank.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 267
Abbreviations

Abbreviations Full Name
A
ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer
AF Assured Forwarding
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
ANSI American National Standards Institute
APR Automatic Power Reduce
APS Automatic Protection Switching
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
AU-n Administrative Unit, level n
AUG Administrative Unit Group
B
BE Best Effort
C
C-n Container-n
CIR Committed Information Rate
COS Class Of Service
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CSF Client Signal Failure
D
DCC Data Communications Channel
DCN Data Communications Network
DXC Digital Cross-Connect
E
ECC Embedded Control Channel
EF Expedited Forwarding
EIR Excessive Information Rate
EOS Ethernet Over SDH
EPL Ethernet Private Line
ES Error Second

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
268 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Abbreviations Full Name
ETSI European Telecommunication Standards Institute
EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line
EVPLAN Ethernet Virtual Private LAN
F
FE Fast Ethernet
FEBBE Far End Background Block Error
FEES Far End Errored Second
FESES Far End Severely Errored Second
G
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GUI Graphical User Interface
GFP Generic Framing Procedures
H
HDLC High Digital Link Control
I
IP Internet Protocol
ITU-T
International Telecommunication Union
-Telecommunication Standardization Sector
L
LAN Local Area Network
LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCT Local Craft Terminal
LFD Loss of Frame Delineation
LOF Loss Of Frame
LOM Loss Of Multiframe
LOP Loss Of Pointer
LOS Loss Of Signal
LSP Label Switched Path
LST Link Status Transport
M
MCU Micro-Control Unit
MS Multiplex Section
MS-AIS Multiplex Section - Alarm Indication Signal
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
MS-SPRing Multiplexer Section Shared Protection Ring
MST Multiplex Section Terminal
MSTP Multi-service Transport Platform

Abbreviations
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 269
Abbreviations Full Name
N
NE Network Element
NTP Network Time Protocol
P
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
PIR Peak Information Rate
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
POH Path OverHead
PSE Protection Switching Event
PTR Pointer
PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit
PW Pseudo Wire
Q
QoS Quality of Service
R
RPR Resilient Packet Ring
RS Regenerator Section
RSOH Regenerator Section OverHead
S
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SEC SDH Equipment Clock
SES Severely Errored Second
SESR Severely Errored Second Ratio
SNC Sub-Network Connection
SNCP Sub-Network Connection Protection
SPRING Shared Protection Ring
SSM Synchronization Status Message
STM-N Synchronous Transport Module, level N (N=1, 4, 16, 64)
T
TS Time Slot
TU-m Tributary Unit, level m
TUG-m Tributary Unit Group, level m
U
UAS Unavailable Second
UBR Unspecified Bit Rate
UNEQ Unequipped
UNI User Network Interface

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
270 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Abbreviations Full Name
V
VC Virtual Channel
VC Virtual Container
VC-n Virtual Container, level n
VCG Virtual Container Group
VLAN Virtual Local Area Network
VP Virtual Path
W
WAN Wide Area Network
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WTR Wait to Restore time

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 271
Figures

Figure 1 Networking Diagram....................................................................... 5
Figure 2 Create NE Dialog Box (for NE A)....................................................... 9
Figure 3 Client Operation Window with NE A Created......................................10
Figure 4 Card Management Dialog Box .........................................................11
Figure 5 Simulative Rack of NE A.................................................................12
Figure 6 Simulative Rack of NE B.................................................................12
Figure 7 Simulative Rack of NE C.................................................................13
Figure 8 Simulative Rack of NE D ................................................................13
Figure 9 Simulative Rack of NE E.................................................................14
Figure 10 Simulative Rack of NE F ...............................................................14
Figure 11 Link Management Dialog Box (without Optical Links) ........................15
Figure 12 Topology with Optical Links ..........................................................16
Figure 13 Link Dialog Box (with Established Optical Links)...............................17
Figure 14 MS Protection Config Dialog Box....................................................18
Figure 15 MS Group Config Dialog Box .........................................................18
Figure 16 MS Protection Config Dialog Box....................................................19
Figure 17 MS Protection Config Dialog Box (with NEs added) ...........................20
Figure 18 APS ID Config Dialog Box .............................................................20
Figure 19 APS Operation Dialog Box.............................................................21
Figure 20 Service Config Dialog Box of NE A..................................................22
Figure 21 Service Config Dialog Box of NE E..................................................24
Figure 22 Clock Source Config Dialog Box.....................................................28
Figure 23 Clock Config Dialog Box ...............................................................29
Figure 24 Compatible Page of the Clock Source Dialog Box..............................30
Figure 25 OW Auto-set Dialog Box...............................................................31
Figure 26 Auto Create OW Number Dialog Box ..............................................31
Figure 27 Select OW Protection Byte Dialog Box ............................................32
Figure 28 OW Configuration Dialog Box (Query Result) ...................................32
Figure 29 Select OW Protection Byte Dialog Box (Verifying).............................33
Figure 30 Download DB Dialog Box..............................................................34
Figure 31 Create the Service Layer Circuit ....................................................38
Figure 32 Create the PDH Circuit .................................................................39
Figure 33 Create Trunk Circuit .....................................................................40
Figure 34 Add Tributaries ...........................................................................41
Figure 35 Create Concatenation Circuit.........................................................42
Figure 36 Create Data Service Circuit...........................................................43
Figure 37 Create Circuit-Speed, Direction, Priority Dialog Box..........................44
Figure 38 Create circuit-node information Dialog Box .....................................45
Figure 39 Create circuit-affirm Dialog Box.....................................................45
Figure 40 Create circuit-node information Dialog Box .....................................46
Figure 41 Select AZ End Termination Dialog Box............................................46
Figure 42 TGEB Installation Interface...........................................................52
Figure 43 User Port Configuration Flowchart of SFE/SGE Board ........................61
Figure 44 System Port Configuration Flowchart of SFE/SGE Board ....................63
Figure 45 VLAN/STP Configuration Flowchart of SFE/SGE Board .......................67
Figure 46 Configuration Flowchart of SE Board User Ports ...............................72
Figure 47 Configuration Flowchart of SE Board VCG (EOS) Ports ......................73
Figure 48 VLAN Mark Configuration Flowchart of SE Board ..............................75
Figure 49 Configuration Flowchart of VCG (EOS) Ports on SE Board..................81
Figure 50 VLAN/STP Configuration Flowchart of SE Board................................83

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
272 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Figure 51 User Port Configuration Flowchart of RSEA Board.............................87
Figure 52 System Port Configuration Flowchart of RSEA Board.........................90
Figure 53 User Isolation Configuration Flowchart of RSEA Board.......................92
Figure 54 Configuration Flowchart of User Ports...........................................104
Figure 55 Flowchart of Configuring VCG (GFP MPLS) Port Capacity and VCG (EOS)
port Capacity (MSE Board))................................................................108
Figure 56 Workflow of Establishing the LSP (MSE Board)...............................111
Figure 57 VFI Config Dialog Box (EVPL Service) (1)......................................115
Figure 58 VFI Config Dialog Box (EVPL Service) (2)......................................116
Figure 59 VSI Configuration (EVPLA Service) (1)..........................................119
Figure 60 VSI Configuration (EVPLA Service) (2)..........................................119
Figure 61 VSI Configuration (EVPLA Service) (3)..........................................120
Figure 62 New Emul Port Dialog Box ..........................................................121
Figure 63 VSI Configuration (Add VALN for Emulation Ethernet Port) (1) .........122
Figure 64 VSI Configuration (Add VALN for Emulation Ethernet Port) (2) .........122
Figure 65 ZXMP S320 Point-to-Point Networking..........................................124
Figure 66 Card Management Dialog Box of NE K ..........................................125
Figure 67 Card Management Dialog Box of NE L...........................................125
Figure 68 Advanced Dialog Box of SFE4 Card ..............................................126
Figure 69 Path Group Config Page .............................................................127
Figure 70 Set Port Capacity Page...............................................................128
Figure 71 LCAS Config Page of NE L...........................................................129
Figure 72 Data Card Property Page of NE K.................................................130
Figure 73 Data Card VLAN Config Dialog Box...............................................131
Figure 74 Networking Example for ATM Service ...........................................138
Figure 75 ATM Service Relationship ...........................................................138
Figure 76 Card Management Dialog Box of NE M..........................................139
Figure 77 Card Management Dialog Box of NE N..........................................140
Figure 78 Card Port Configuration..............................................................141
Figure 79 PVC Configuration Dialog Box......................................................142
Figure 80 PVC Connection Configuration.....................................................143
Figure 81 Service Config Dialog Box...........................................................143
Figure 82 MS Property Config Dialog Box....................................................146
Figure 83 Set Squelch Mode Dialog Box......................................................146
Figure 84 MS protection Dialog Box ...........................................................149
Figure 85 DCC Use Set Dialog Box..............................................................151
Figure 86 DCN Networking Example...........................................................152
Figure 87 NE Static Route Configuration Dialog Box (NE5).............................153
Figure 88 NE Static Route Configuration Dialog Box (NE9).............................154
Figure 89 DCN Network (1) ......................................................................155
Figure 90 Networking Diagram of Capacity Expansion Without Multiplex Section
Protection........................................................................................157
Figure 91 Save Expansion Configuration in EMS Database.............................158
Figure 92 Expansion of MS Protection Ring Network .....................................159
Figure 93 Save Expansion Configuration in EMS Database.............................160
Figure 94 Expansion of MS Protection Link Network......................................161
Figure 95 MS Chain Page of Expand-Modify MS Group Dialog Box................... 162
Figure 96 Save Expansion Configuration to EMS Database.............................162
Figure 97 Circuit Query Dialog Box ............................................................164
Figure 98 Query BC Circuit Grp Dialog Box..................................................165
Figure 99 Search SDH Ne and Link Dialog Box (Search All)............................167
Figure 100 Ack Searched Ne Dialog Box .....................................................168
Figure 101 Search SDH Ne and Link Dialog Box (Search From Ne)..................169
Figure 102 Alarm Mask Dialog Box.............................................................174
Figure 103 Alarm Severity Dialog Box ........................................................175
Figure 104 Alarm Standby Dialog Box ........................................................177
Figure 105 Alarm Audible Set Dialog Box....................................................178
Figure 106 Alarm Prompt Setting Dialog Box...............................................180
Figure 107 Alarm Filter Setting Dialog Box (AlarmReport Filter Page)..............182
Figure 108 Agent External Alarm Setting Dialog Box.....................................183
Figure 109 Alarm Diagnose Config Dialog Box .............................................185

Figures
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 273
Figure 110 Client Operation Window (Current Alarm Sub-Page) .....................189
Figure 111 Querying Alarms Through Status Board (1) .................................189
Figure 112 Querying Alarms Through Status Board (2) .................................190
Figure 113 Alarm Statistic Dialog Box.........................................................191
Figure 114 Current Alarm Management Dialog Box (AllAlarm Page) ................192
Figure 115 History Alarm Statistic Dialog Box..............................................193
Figure 116 History Alarm Dialog Box..........................................................194
Figure 117 Alarm Statistic Dialog Box (Locked Alarm)...................................196
Figure 118 Result Dialog Box (Circuit Alarm Analysis)...................................199
Figure 119 Performance Threshold Dialog Box.............................................202
Figure 120 Performance Register Reset Dialog Box.......................................204
Figure 121 Zero-Performance Restrain Dialog Box........................................205
Figure 122 Performance Mask Dialog Box ...................................................206
Figure 123 SNC Switch Config Dialog Box ...................................................209
Figure 124 Rpr Board Traff AdminPara Setting Dialog Box ............................. 210
Figure 125 Performance Management Dialog Box (with Query Result).............211
Figure 126 Performance Task Dialog Box ....................................................216
Figure 127 Task Statistic Result Dialog Box..................................................216
Figure 128 Loopback Directions.................................................................222
Figure 129 Query all boards version dialog box............................................242
Figure 130 Query all boards version result Dialog Box ..................................243
Figure 131 Time Management Dialog Box ...................................................244
Figure 132 SPF Query Result Dialogue Box ..................................................247
Figure 133 Consistency of NE's Data Immediately Dialog Box .........................249
Figure 134 Consistency of NE's Data Periodically Dialog Box...........................249
Figure 135 Upload and Compare Dialog Box................................................256
Figure 136 Autoed upload and compare Dialog Box......................................257
Figure 137 Unitrans Report Window...........................................................260
Figure 138 Net Path Ne Select Dialog Box...................................................264
Figure 139 Net Path Report Dialog Box (Exception RSLink page) ....................265


ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
274 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION













This page is intentionally blank.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 275
Tables

Table 1 Typographical Conventions...............................................................iii
Table 2 Mouse Operation Conventions...........................................................iii
Table 3 Safety Signs...................................................................................iv
Table 4 Networking Flow of Online NEs.......................................................... 3
Table 5 Networking Flow of Offline NEs.......................................................... 4
Table 6 Type of Equipment and Service Boards............................................... 6
Table 7 Board Configuration of ZXMP S390 (NE A, B, C, and D) ........................ 6
Table 8 Board Configuration of ZXMP S380 (NE E) .......................................... 6
Table 9 Board Configuration of ZXMP S360 (NE F)........................................... 7
Table 10 Layout of IP Address for Each NE and the EMS Computer .................... 7
Table 11 NE Information ............................................................................. 8
Table 12 Link Configuration ........................................................................15
Table 13 Configuration of Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Group...........................19
Table 14 Configuration of Four-fiber 1+1 MSP Link.........................................22
Table 15 MSP Relationship Configuration ......................................................23
Table 16 Traffic Requirements.....................................................................24
Table 17 Timeslot Configuration of NE A.......................................................25
Table 18 Timeslot Configuration of NE B (1)..................................................25
Table 19 Timeslot Configuration of NE B (2)..................................................25
Table 20 Timeslot Configuration of NE C (1)..................................................25
Table 21 Timeslot Configuration of NE C (2)..................................................26
Table 22 Timeslot Configuration of NE C (3)..................................................26
Table 23 Timeslot Configuration of NE D (1)..................................................26
Table 24 Timeslot Configuration of NE D (2)..................................................26
Table 25 Timeslot Configuration of NE D (3)..................................................27
Table 26 Timeslot Configuration of NE E .......................................................27
Table 27 Timeslot Configuration of NE F .......................................................27
Table 28 Clock Source Configuration............................................................29
Table 29 Transparent Transmission Ethernet Boards.......................................50
Table 30 Selection Principles of TFE Board ....................................................53
Table 31 Data Property of TFE Board............................................................54
Table 32 Mapping Regulations of System Ports in TFE Board............................55
Table 33 Port Properties of Ethernet Adapter Manager Dialog Box .....................56
Table 34 Settings of VLAN Mark Page of TFE Board ........................................57
Table 35 SFE/SGE Series Boards .................................................................59
Table 36 User Port Configuration Parameters of SFE/SGE Board.......................61
Table 37 System Port Configuration Parameters of SFE/SGE Board...................64
Table 38 Parameters of SFE/SGE Board Property ...........................................65
Table 39 VLAN/STP Configuration Description of SFE/SGE Board ......................68
Table 40 SE Boards ...................................................................................69
Table 41 Parameters of SE Board Property....................................................70
Table 42 Port Property Parameters of SE Board .............................................73
Table 43 Parameters of VLAN Mark Page of SE Board .....................................75
Table 44 Optional Pages in Ethernet adapter manager Dialog Box of SE Board ...77
Table 45 VCG (EOS) Port Capacity Parameters of SE Board .............................81
Table 46 VLAN/STP Configuration Description of SE Board...............................84
Table 47 RPR Series Boards........................................................................85
Table 48 RPR Ports....................................................................................85
Table 49 User Port Configuration Parameters of RSEA Board............................88

ZXONM E300 (V3.19) Operation Manual (Volume II)
276 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Table 50 RSEA Board Property Parameters....................................................90
Table 51 MPLS Ethernet Service Boards......................................................100
Table 52 Properties of MSE Board..............................................................102
Table 53 Parameters and Configuration Principles ........................................104
Table 54 Parameters and Configuration Principles of MPLS port (MSE Board) ...105
Table 55 Configurations of Loop Check page ...............................................107
Table 56 Parameter Descriptions of VCG Port Capacity..................................108
Table 57 Parameter Descriptions of Establishing LSP (MSE Board) ..................112
Table 58 Parameter Descriptions of Establishing New LSP (MSE Board) ...........113
Table 59 Path Group Configuration Requirements ........................................127
Table 60 Requirements of LCAS Configuration .............................................128
Table 61 Connection Configuration of NE K and NE L ....................................130
Table 62 VLAN Configuration Requirements.................................................131
Table 63 Timeslot Configuration of NE K.....................................................132
Table 64 Timeslot Configuration of NE L .....................................................132
Table 65 ATM Cards.................................................................................133
Table 66 ATM Attributes List .....................................................................134
Table 67 Parameter Descriptions in Timer Set Dialog Box of ATM Board ..........136
Table 68 ATM Service Requirements ..........................................................138
Table 69 Connection Configuration ............................................................141
Table 70 Flow Configuration Requirements..................................................142
Table 71 TTP Configuration Requirements...................................................142
Table 72 DCC Use Configuration.................................................................149
Table 73 Static Route Information .............................................................152
Table 74 Parameter Descriptions of Setting Gateway NE ...............................156
Table 75 Parameter Descriptions of Configuring Static Router for NE6 and NE9 156
Table 76 Connection Relationships.............................................................158
Table 77 Connection Configuration (NE7)....................................................159
Table 78 Connection Configuration (NE12)..................................................161
Table 79 Query Types of SDH NEs .............................................................212
Table 80 Performance Task Parameter Setting.............................................215
Table 81 Relations between Loopback Points and Cards ................................222
Table 82 Setting Loopback Parameters.......................................................223
Table 83 Relations between Alarm Insertion Points and Cards........................224
Table 84 Setting Parameters for Inserting an Alarm .....................................225
Table 85 Bit Error Types...........................................................................226
Table 86 Relation between Insertion Points and Cards ..................................226
Table 87 Setting Parameters for Inserting a Bit Error....................................227
Table 88 Meanings of APS Parameters........................................................229
Table 89 CS Card Forced State Commands .................................................232
Table 90 Cards and Ports Supporting Port Mirror..........................................240
Table 91 Current Alarm PSE Report List......................................................261
Table 92 Reports of History Alarm Performance PSE.....................................262
Table 93 Net Path Reports........................................................................263